WO2019047129A1 - Method for moving application icons, and terminal - Google Patents

Method for moving application icons, and terminal Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019047129A1
WO2019047129A1 PCT/CN2017/100955 CN2017100955W WO2019047129A1 WO 2019047129 A1 WO2019047129 A1 WO 2019047129A1 CN 2017100955 W CN2017100955 W CN 2017100955W WO 2019047129 A1 WO2019047129 A1 WO 2019047129A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
icon
control
page
input
terminal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/100955
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈常款
王萌
陶强
汤长伟
高光远
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2017/100955 priority Critical patent/WO2019047129A1/en
Priority to CN201780073702.4A priority patent/CN110023894A/en
Publication of WO2019047129A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019047129A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of electronic technologies, and in particular, to a method and a terminal for moving an application icon.
  • the user can move the application icon by long pressing an application icon and then dragging the application icon to the idle position of the display page.
  • the operation of moving a plurality of application icons one by one is cumbersome and the human-computer interaction performance is poor.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a method and a terminal for moving an application icon, which can simultaneously move at least two application icons to improve management efficiency of an application icon on the display page.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, the method includes: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the terminal display, in response to the first instruction An application icon and a folder icon, the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to activate the first control; and the first icon is moved by the first page in response to the user inputting the first icon in the first page Displaying in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to a second input by the user to the first control, the first one in the first control The second icon is displayed on the idle position of the second page of the terminal, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  • the terminal may implement simultaneous movement of multiple icons (application icons and/or folder icons) on the display page of the terminal by using the first control, and may improve the display page of the mobile terminal.
  • the management efficiency of the application icons may be implemented by using the first control, and may improve the display page of the mobile terminal.
  • the second page is the same as the first page
  • the second input is used to select a second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the second Displayed on the free location of the page.
  • the terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user includes: the terminal responds to the user in the first control
  • the second input of the second icon moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display.
  • the terminal may not only move all the second icons in the first control to the idle position of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user, as described in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal may also be configured to move the second icon selected to be moved to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a portion of the first icon in the first control.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the third input of the second icon in the first control by the user, the third The input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in the first preset manner.
  • the foregoing “displaying, by the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal” includes: the terminal responding to the first control by the user The second input moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal for display. The second input is different from the third input.
  • the terminal may move the second icon that is selected to be displayed to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a part of the first icon in the first control, and the terminal may be implemented.
  • the targeted management of the application icons improves the efficiency of the terminal management application icons.
  • the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side.
  • the third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  • the terminal may display a part of the second icon on the second page when the target display page of the second icon (ie, the second page) is insufficient to display all the second icons, and the remaining second The icon displays a third page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or displays the remaining second icon on the first page.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: displaying, by the terminal, a second desktop including the first control, the first control includes a first icon, and the fourth input is used to switch the terminal, in response to the fourth input of the first desktop by the user Display page.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, the method comprising: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage display of the terminal, in response to the first instruction An application icon and a folder icon in the page, the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start the first control; in response to the first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, the first icon is used by the first page Moving to display in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to the second input of the user to the first display position on the second page, the first in the first control The second icon is moved to display on the first display position, the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control; the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position; The third icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
  • the terminal may selectively move the second icon in the first control to the display position specified by the user in the second page, thereby realizing accurate movement of the application icon or the folder icon.
  • the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon of the first control that is moved to the first control.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the third input of the second icon by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and adopting the first preset manner in the first control The second icon is displayed in .
  • the third display icon is displayed on the first display position, the third icon may be an application icon, or the third icon may be a folder icon.
  • the method further includes: the terminal moving the third icon from the first display position to the first control in response to the second input of the first display position by the user. That is, in this possible design method, whether the third icon is an application icon or a folder icon, when the terminal detects the second input of the third icon by the user, the terminal may use the third icon by the foregoing A display position is moved to the display in the first control, and the second icon in the first control is moved to the first display position for display.
  • a third icon is displayed on the first display position, and the third icon is a folder icon.
  • the above “terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position on the second page” includes: The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the third icon displayed on the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position. That is, in this possible design method, if the third icon is a folder icon, the terminal may move the second icon in the first control after the terminal detects the second input of the third icon by the user. Displayed in the folder corresponding to the folder icon.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, where the method includes: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the terminal, in response to the first instruction Displaying an application icon and a folder icon in the page, the first instruction is for instructing the terminal to start the first control; in response to the first input of the first control by the user, displaying at least one folder in the terminal in the first control An icon in response to a second input by the user to the first folder icon of the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, and the selected first folder is displayed in a first preset manner Icon; in response to the user's third input of the first icon displayed on the first page, moving the first icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
  • the terminal may display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user.
  • the user can view the plurality of folder icons in the terminal in the first control, and selectively move the first icon in the first page to the folder icon selected by the user (ie, the first folder)
  • the icon corresponds to the folder).
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application further The method includes: in response to the fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the terminal displays an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon, the fourth input being different from the second input.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the user
  • the fifth input of the second icon in the page moves the second icon from the first page to the first control, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page.
  • the method also includes the terminal responding to a sixth input by the user to a third icon in the first control, the sixth input for selecting the application icon or folder icon from the first control
  • the third icon moves the selected third icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
  • the method of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the first a first input of the control, displaying a new folder icon in the first control, the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the user inputting the newly created folder icon, displaying a new in the first control a folder name entry of the folder icon; in response to the user inputting the folder name entry, displaying the named new folder icon in the first control.
  • the method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application can prevent the user from frequently switching the display page of the terminal to find the target folder and improve the application icon when moving the first icon to a certain folder. Management efficiency; you can also create a new folder on the terminal's display page through the first control.
  • the first control described in the above first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, and possible design methods thereof is displayed on the first page.
  • the first control described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and its possible design method can be moved on the first page.
  • the area of the first control described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the possible design method thereof is smaller than the area of the first page.
  • the first icon described in the above first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, and possible design method thereof is moved by the first page to the first control The process gradually becomes smaller.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the area of the first control when the first icon includes an application icon and/or a folder icon.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a display unit and an input unit.
  • the display unit is configured to display, according to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the display unit, and the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start a first control; an input unit, configured to receive a first input of a first icon in a first page displayed by the display unit; and a display unit, configured to move the first icon from the first page in response to the first input Displaying in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; the input unit is further configured to receive a second input of the first control by the user; the display unit is further configured to respond to the second Inputting, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  • the second page displayed by the display unit is the same as the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second input received by the input unit is used to select the second icon from the first control, and indicates that the terminal will The selected second icon is moved to the idle position of the second page for display.
  • a display unit configured to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, including: a display unit, configured to respond to the user The second input of the second icon in the first control moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive the user in the first control before the display unit moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal.
  • the third input of the second icon a display unit, further configured to respond to the user's third input to the second icon in the first control The third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in the first preset manner.
  • the display unit is configured to: in response to the second input of the first control by the user, move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including: a display unit, configured to respond to The second input of the first control by the user moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal for display.
  • the second input received by the input unit is different from the third input received by the input unit.
  • the second page displayed by the display unit is different from the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, the first side It is left or right.
  • a display unit configured to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, including: a display unit, configured to respond to the user a second input of the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the terminal moves the M second icons in the first control to the first
  • the M pages of the two pages are displayed, and the remaining NM icons in the first control are displayed to be displayed in the idle position of the third page of the terminal.
  • the third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  • the above display unit is configured to hover the first control on the first page.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive a movement gesture of the first control by the user.
  • the display unit is further configured to display the first control on the first page according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture in response to the moving gesture.
  • the area of the first control displayed by the display unit is smaller than the area of the first page displayed by the display unit.
  • the display unit is further configured to display a dynamic image in which the first icon gradually becomes smaller during the process of moving the first icon from the first page to the first control.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the first control when the first control includes the application icon and/or the folder icon. Area.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a graphical user interface (GUI), where the GUI is stored in a terminal, where the terminal includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used by the processor. Executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the GUI includes: displaying, in response to the first instruction, a first page including a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the touch screen, the first instruction is used to indicate processing Transmitting the first control; in response to the first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the page to the first control on the touch screen, the first icon being in the first page An application icon or a folder icon; in response to the second input to the first control, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the touch screen on the touch screen, the second icon is An application icon or a folder icon in the above first control.
  • the second page is the same as the first page
  • the second input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the second page. Displayed in the idle position.
  • the GUI further includes: in response to the user's second input to the second icon in the first control, moving the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first control Before displaying, In response to the third input to the second icon in the first control, the third input is for selecting the second icon from the first control, and displaying the selected second icon in the first preset manner on the touch screen; The second input to the first control is displayed on the touch screen by moving the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page of the terminal, wherein the second input is different from the third input.
  • the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side.
  • the GUI further includes: in response to the second input to the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the first control is on the touch screen.
  • the M second icons are displayed on the M idle positions of the second page, and the remaining NM second icons in the first control are displayed on the touch screen to be displayed on the idle position of the third page of the touch screen.
  • the third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  • the GUI further includes: floating the first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: in response to the moving gesture to the first control, moving the displayed first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture.
  • the area of the first control displayed on the touch screen is smaller than the area of the first page displayed on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: moving the first icon from the first page to the display in the first control in response to the first input, and displaying the first icon on the touch screen gradually changes Small dynamic image.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the first control when the first control includes the application icon and/or the folder icon. Area.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a display unit and an input unit.
  • the display unit is configured to display, according to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the application icon and the folder icon in the display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate The terminal starts the first control.
  • an input unit configured to receive a first input of the first control by the user.
  • the display unit is further configured to display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive a second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, and the second input is used to select the first folder icon.
  • the display unit is further configured to display the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input.
  • the input unit is further configured to receive a third input of the first icon in the first page by the user.
  • the display unit is further configured to move the first icon to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the third input.
  • the input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control, in response to the first input of the first control by the user, receiving the user pair a fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the fourth input being different from the second input.
  • the display unit is further configured to display an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to the fourth input.
  • the input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays the first control on the first page of the terminal, in response to the first instruction, receive the second icon in the first page by the user.
  • the fifth input the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page.
  • Display unit also used to respond to the first Five inputs move the second icon from the first page to the first control.
  • the input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, receiving the user pair A sixth input of the third icon in the first control, the sixth input is for selecting a third icon from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control.
  • the display unit is further configured to move the selected third icon to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the sixth input.
  • the display unit is further configured to respond to the first input of the first control by the user after displaying the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction.
  • the new folder icon is displayed in the first control, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder.
  • the input unit is also used to receive user input to the newly created folder icon.
  • the display unit is further configured to display a folder name input item of the new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the new folder icon.
  • the input unit is also used to receive user input to the folder name input.
  • the display unit is further configured to display the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a GUI, where the GUI is stored in a terminal, where the terminal includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors, where the one or more processors are configured to execute one or Multiple computer programs.
  • the GUI includes: displaying, in response to the first instruction, a first page including a first control on the touch screen, the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in the display page of the terminal, and the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start a first control; in response to the first input to the first control, displaying at least one of the touch screens in the first control displayed on the touch screen; in response to the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon a second input for selecting a first folder icon, displaying the selected first folder icon on the touch screen in a first preset manner; in response to the third icon in the first page Input, move the first icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: after displaying the at least one folder icon in the touch screen in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control, in response to the pair
  • the fourth input of the second folder icon in one of the folder icons displays the application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon on the touch screen, and the fourth input is different from the second input.
  • the GUI further includes: responding to the fifth icon of the second icon in the first page after displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen in response to the first instruction Inputting, moving the second icon from the first page to the first control on the touch screen, the second icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to the first of the at least one folder icon a second input of the folder icon, after displaying the selected first folder icon in the first preset manner on the touch screen, in response to the sixth input to the third icon in the first control, the sixth input is used to The third icon is selected from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control, and the selected third icon is moved to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: after displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen, in response to the first instruction, responding to the first input to the first control on the touch screen
  • the new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the input of the newly created folder icon, the folder of the new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
  • Name input item displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the user inputting the folder name input item Name the new folder icon.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a processor, a memory, and a touch screen; the processor, the memory is coupled to the touch screen, and the memory is used to store computer program code and Data relating to a first control, the computer program code comprising instructions, when the processor executes the instructions, the terminal performs as described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and possible implementations thereof.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including a computer instruction, when the computer instruction is run on a terminal, causing the terminal to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third And a method of mobile application icons as described in any of the possible implementations.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and any one of the A method of moving an application icon as described.
  • the terminal of the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, and the eighth aspect, the GUI of the fifth aspect and the seventh aspect, the computer storage medium of the ninth aspect, and the tenth aspect are all used to perform the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be referred to the beneficial effects in the corresponding methods provided above, and are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram 1 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a second schematic diagram of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart 1 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a third schematic diagram of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram 4 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram 5 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram 6 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram 7 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram 8 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram 9 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram 10 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram 11 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram 12 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 15 is a second flowchart of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram 13 of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart 3 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 20 is a schematic diagram 16 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart 4 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart 5 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 25A is a flowchart 6 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 25B is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart 7 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart 9 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 32 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart 10 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 36A is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 36B is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 39 is a schematic structural diagram 1 of a terminal structure according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 40 is a second schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and are not to be construed as indicating or implying a relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Thus, features defining “first” and “second” may include one or more of the features either explicitly or implicitly. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, “multiple” means two or more unless otherwise stated.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method and a terminal for moving an application icon, and the method can be applied to move or manage an application icon (ie, an icon of an application) and a folder icon on a display page of the terminal, where the folder icon corresponds to At least two application icons can be included in the folder.
  • an application icon ie, an icon of an application
  • a folder icon on a display page of the terminal, where the folder icon corresponds to At least two application icons can be included in the folder.
  • the terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (such as the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1), a tablet computer, a personal computer (PC), and a personal digital assistant that can install an application and display an application icon.
  • a mobile phone such as the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1
  • a tablet computer such as the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1
  • PC personal computer
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • smart watch such as the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1
  • netbook such as the specific form of the device is not particularly limited.
  • the terminal in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more applications, and display an icon of the application in the terminal on a display page of the terminal.
  • the application program in the embodiment of the present application can be divided into an embedded application (ie, a system application of the terminal) and a downloadable application.
  • the embedded application is an application provided as part of the implementation of the terminal (such as the mobile phone 100).
  • the downloadable application is an application that can provide its own Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) connection.
  • IMS Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem
  • the downloadable application can be pre-installed in the terminal or can be downloaded by the user. And install third-party applications in the terminal.
  • the terminal includes a home screen, and the home screen may include one or more display pages.
  • the one or more display pages can be used to display application icons and folder icons in the phone.
  • the terminal in the embodiment of the present application is the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the mobile phone 100 can include three display pages, that is, the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1, the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, and the display page 102 in FIG. c) Display page 103 as shown.
  • the home screen of the mobile phone 100 can include these three display pages.
  • the mobile phone 100 has applications such as a “calculator” application, a “map” application, a “WiFi universal key” application, an "email” application, a “mobile phone Taobao” application, and the like.
  • the application icon corresponding to the application in the mobile phone 100 can be displayed in the display page of the mobile phone 100.
  • the following application icons are displayed on the display page 101 of the mobile phone 100: a "calculator” application icon, a "map” application icon, and a "WiFi Master Key” application icon.
  • the following application icons are displayed on the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100: “email” application icon, "utility” folder icon, “setup” application icon, "finance” folder Icon 104 and “Stock” application icon 105 and the like.
  • the following application icons are displayed on the display page 103 of the mobile phone 100: a "QQ" application icon, a "shared bicycle” application icon, and a "weather” application icon.
  • the "Settings” application, the "Photo” application, and the “Camera” application in the mobile phone 100 may be referred to as an embedded application (ie, a system application) of the mobile phone 100, a "stock” application, a “QQ” application, The “shared bicycle” application, the “WeChat” application, and the like may be referred to as a downloadable application of the mobile phone 100.
  • an embedded application ie, a system application
  • the “shared bicycle” application, the "WeChat” application, and the like may be referred to as a downloadable application of the mobile phone 100.
  • the folder corresponding to the folder icon described in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more application icons.
  • the folder icon 104 is expanded.
  • the expanded window 201 of the "Finance” folder icon 104 includes the "ICBC" application included in the "Finance” folder and the application icon of the "Bank of China” application.
  • the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 3 is only an example of the terminal, and the mobile phone 100 may have more or less components than those shown in the figure, may combine two or more components, or may have Different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in FIG. 3 may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the mobile phone 100 includes an RF (Radio Frequency) circuit 310, a memory 320, an input unit 330, a display 340, a sensor 350, an audio circuit 360, a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) module 370, and processing.
  • Device 380, and power supply 390 and other components It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the structure of the handset shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation to the handset, and may include more or less components than those illustrated, or some components may be combined, or different component arrangements.
  • the components of the mobile phone 100 will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 3:
  • the RF circuit 310 can be used for transmitting and receiving information or during a call, and receiving and transmitting signals.
  • the downlink information of the base station can be received and processed by the processor 380.
  • the data related to the uplink is sent to the base station.
  • RF circuitry includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like.
  • RF circuitry 310 can also communicate with the network and other mobile devices via wireless communication.
  • Said Wireless communication may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to global mobile communication systems, general packet radio services, code division multiple access, wideband code division multiple access, long term evolution, email, short message service, and the like.
  • Memory 320 can be used to store software programs and data.
  • the processor 380 performs various functions and data processing of the mobile phone 100 by running software programs and data stored in the memory 320.
  • the memory 320 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area, wherein the storage program area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.), and the like; the storage data area may be stored according to Data created by the use of the mobile phone 100, and the like.
  • the memory 320 can be divided into different storage areas for storing data created by each application and its use according to different functions.
  • the related information of the first control such as a graphical user interface (GUI) of the first control, may be saved in the memory 320 of the terminal in the embodiment of the present application.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • memory 320 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
  • the memory 320 stores an operating system that enables the mobile phone 100 to operate, such as that developed by Apple. Operating system, developed by Google Inc. Open source operating system, developed by Microsoft Corporation Operating system, etc.
  • An input unit 330 such as a touch screen, can be used to receive input numeric or character information, as well as to generate signal inputs related to user settings and function controls of the handset 100.
  • the input unit 330 may include a touch panel 331 disposed on the front surface of the mobile phone 100, and may collect a touch operation on or near the user (such as a user using a finger, a stylus, or the like, any suitable object or accessory on the touch panel 331 The operation is performed on or near the touch panel 331, and the corresponding connection device is driven according to a preset program.
  • the touch panel 331 may include two parts (not shown in FIG. 3) of the touch detection device and the touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, and detects a signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts the touch information into contact coordinates, and sends the touch information.
  • the processor 380 is provided and can receive instructions from the processor 380 and execute them.
  • the touch panel 331 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves.
  • the display 340 (i.e., display screen) can be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user and a graphical user interface (GUI) of various menus of the mobile phone 100.
  • Display 340 can include a display panel 341 disposed on the front of handset 100.
  • the display panel 341 can be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, a light emitting diode, or the like.
  • the handset 100 includes a front side and a back side.
  • An optical touch button is disposed at the bottom of the front surface; a touch panel 331 and a display panel 341 are further disposed, and the touch panel 331 is overlaid on the display panel 341.
  • the touch panel 331 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 380 to determine a touch event, and then the processor 380 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 341 according to the type of the touch event.
  • the touch panel 331 and the display panel 341 are used as two independent components to implement the input and input functions of the mobile phone 100, in some embodiments, the touch panel 331 may be integrated with the display panel 341. To realize the input and output functions of the mobile phone 100, the integrated touch panel 331 and the display panel 341 may be simply referred to as a touch display screen.
  • the touch panel 331 can also be provided with a pressure sensing sensor, so that when the user performs a touch operation on the touch panel, the touch panel can also detect the pressure of the touch operation.
  • the mobile phone 100 can detect the touch operation more accurately.
  • the handset 100 can also include at least one type of sensor 350, such as a light sensor, motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein, as shown in FIG. 1A, the ambient light sensor 351 may adjust the brightness of the display panel 341 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity light sensor 352 is disposed on the front of the mobile phone 100.
  • the mobile phone 100 When the mobile phone 100 is moved to the ear, the mobile phone 100 turns off the power of the display panel 341 according to the detection of the proximity light sensor 352, so that the mobile phone 100 can further save power.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes). When it is stationary, it can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity.
  • the mobile phone 100 can be used to identify the gesture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Game, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.
  • the mobile phone 100 can also be configured with gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors and other sensors, here Let me repeat.
  • the front of the front of the mobile phone 100 may be provided with a front camera 353, and the top of the back is provided with a rear camera 354.
  • the audio circuit 360, the speaker 361, and the microphone 362 can provide an audio interface between the user and the handset 100.
  • the audio circuit 360 can transmit the converted electrical data of the received audio data to the speaker 361 for conversion to the sound signal output by the speaker 361; on the other hand, the microphone 362 converts the collected sound signal into an electrical signal, by the audio circuit 360. After receiving, it is converted into audio data, and the audio data is output to the RF circuit 310 for transmission to, for example, another mobile phone, or the audio data is output to the memory 320 for further processing.
  • WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology
  • the mobile phone 100 can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 370, which provides wireless broadband Internet access for users.
  • the processor 380 is a control center of the mobile phone 100, and connects various parts of the entire mobile phone by using various interfaces and lines, and executes the mobile phone 100 by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 320 and calling data stored in the memory 320. A variety of functions and processing data to monitor the phone as a whole.
  • processor 380 can include one or more processing units; processor 380 can also integrate an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor primarily processes operating systems, user interfaces, applications, and the like The modem processor primarily handles wireless communications. It will be appreciated that the above described modem processor may also not be integrated into the processor 380.
  • the Bluetooth module 381 is configured to perform information interaction with other devices through a short-range communication protocol such as Bluetooth.
  • the mobile phone 100 can establish a Bluetooth connection through the Bluetooth module 381 and a wearable electronic device (such as a smart watch) that also has a Bluetooth module, thereby performing data interaction.
  • the handset 100 also includes a power source 390 (such as a battery) that powers the various components.
  • the power supply can be logically coupled to the processor 380 through a power management system to manage functions such as charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. It can be understood that, in the following embodiments, the power source 390 can be used to supply power to the display panel 341 and the touch panel 331.
  • the first control may be installed in the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the terminal may move or manage an application icon (ie, an icon of an application) and a folder icon on a display page of the terminal through the first control.
  • the application icon and/or the folder icon (collectively referred to as the first icon) in the terminal may be added to the first control, and then the terminal may move the first icon added in the first control to the display page of the terminal.
  • the idle location of the display page of the terminal in the embodiment of the present application refers to a location in the display page of the terminal that can be used to display/store the icon but does not currently store the icon.
  • the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1 includes a plurality of "idle positions", and the "idle position" 107 is one of them, as shown in (c) of FIG. Also included are a plurality of "idle locations", one of which is "idle location" 106.
  • the display page of the mobile phone does not identify the idle location, that is, the dotted line frame of the "idle location" in FIG. 1 (a) and (c) is not displayed in the mobile phone 100.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon.
  • the method for moving an application icon includes S401-S403:
  • the terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate the terminal. Start the first control.
  • the first page in the embodiment of the present application may be a display page currently displayed by the terminal.
  • the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1; Then, it is the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1; Then, it is the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG.
  • the first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after detecting a preset gesture input by the user on the first page. For example, suppose the mobile phone 100 currently displays the display page 103 (ie, the first page) shown in (c) of FIG. 1, when the user inputs a preset gesture on the display page 103 (ie, the first page) (eg, the user's finger touches the display page). 103, and after sliding up and down on the display page 103, the mobile phone 100 can display the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG. 5 on the display page 103.
  • the first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after detecting that the preset shortcut key in the terminal is pressed. For example, taking the first page as the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1 , when the user simultaneously presses the two volume keys of the mobile phone 100 , the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 103 on the display page 103 . (c) The first control 503 shown.
  • the drop-down menu at the top of the display page of the terminal may include an “Apply Mobile Control Switch”, and the first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after the user clicks the “Apply Mobile Control Switch”.
  • the first page as the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1 as shown in (a) of FIG. 5 as shown in (a) of FIG. 5
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the pull-down menu 501 as shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the drop down menu 501 can include a "Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)" switch, a “Bluetooth” switch, a "Mobile Network” switch, and an “App Icon Management” switch 502.
  • the "apply icon management” switch 502 is used to activate the first control. For example, when the user clicks the "apply icon management” switch 502 shown in (b) of FIG. 5, the mobile phone 100 can display the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG.
  • the first control 503 may include a first icon for storing (application) A "control storage area” 504, a "drop” button 505, a “left shift” button 506, and a “right shift” button 507 of an icon or folder icon).
  • the “drop” button 505 is used to control the first icon stored in the "control storage area” 504 to move to the idle position of the first page of the terminal; the "left shift” button 506 is used to control the "control storage area" 504.
  • the first icon stored in the file moves to the idle position of the left display page adjacent to the first page; the "right shift” button 507 is used to control the movement of the first icon stored in the "control storage area” 504 to The adjacent right side of the first page shows the free position of the page.
  • the terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control, where the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon, in response to the user inputting the first icon of the first icon in the first page. .
  • the terminal when the terminal starts the first control and displays the first control on the first page, if the terminal detects the user clicking on the application icon or the folder icon on the first page (such as a single The button or the double-click operation, the long-press operation or the re-press operation, the terminal may move the application icon or the folder icon from the first page to the first control. That is, the first input may be: when the terminal displays the first control, the user clicks, long presses or re-presses the application icon or the folder icon on the first page.
  • the first control may be displayed in the display page 102. 503.
  • the mobile phone 100 can move the "Settings” icon 601 from the first page 102 to the first control 503.
  • the display in the middle is displayed in the "control storage area" 504 in the first control 503 as shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the "set" icon 601 is not included in the first page 102 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the first input may be a user dragging operation on the first icon on the first page, and the starting point of the sliding track of the drag operation is the first icon, and the sliding of the drag operation The end point of the track is the first control described above.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the area of any display page of the terminal, including the first page, the second page, and the third page.
  • the area of the first control 503 as shown in (a) of FIG. 6 is smaller than the area of the first page 102.
  • the first icon in the first control is smaller than the first icon in the display page.
  • the "Settings" icon 601 in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 6 is smaller than the “Settings” icon 601 in the first page 102 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the "utility” icon 701 in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 7 is smaller than the "utility” icon 701 in the first page 102 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the first icon is gradually smaller in the process of moving from the first page to the first control. That is, the terminal may display, in response to the first input, a dynamic image in which the first icon is changed from large to small in the process of moving the first icon from the first page to the first control.
  • the "Utility" icon 701 may become smaller during the movement from the first page 102 to the first control 503 along the sliding trajectory 702, that is, in FIG. (a) The "Utility” icon 701 in the first page 102 shown The "Utilities" icon on the sliding track 702 is larger than the "Utilities” icon in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the terminal displays, in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to an idle position of the second page of the terminal.
  • the second page is the same as the first page.
  • the second page and the first page are the display pages 102 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the second input of the first control by the user may be used to instruct the terminal to display the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the first page of the terminal.
  • the second input may be a user's click operation on the "drop" button 505 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can randomly move the second icon ("set" icon 601 and "utility” icon 701) in the first control 503 to The idle location 802 and the idle location 803 of the first page 102 of the handset 100 are displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 may move to the first control 503 in the order of the first icon in the first page, and the idle position of the first page 102 in the order from left to right and from top to bottom.
  • the icon moves to the idle location 802 and the idle location 803 of the first page 102 of the handset 100 for display.
  • a display page as shown in (b) of FIG. 8 is displayed.
  • the "Settings" icon 601 is the first first icon moved to the first control 503, and the "Utilities” icon 701 is the second first icon moved to the first control 503; therefore, the mobile phone 100 can
  • the "Settings” icon 601 is moved to the idle position 802 of the first page 102 of the handset 100, and the "Utilities” icon 701 is moved to the idle position 803 for display.
  • the second page is different from the first page, that is, the second page is a display page different from the first page in the terminal.
  • the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example.
  • the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1
  • the second page may be the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1 or (c) shown in FIG. Display page 103.
  • the second page may also be other display pages of the mobile phone 100 not shown in FIG. 1.
  • the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is a left side or a right side.
  • the second input can be used to instruct the terminal to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page for display.
  • the second page may be a figure.
  • the above second input may be a click operation for the "left shift" button 506 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 currently displays the display page 102 (first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 9.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the map.
  • the display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of 9 includes the "set” icon 601 and the "utility” icon in the display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of FIG. 701, and the first control 503.
  • the "set” icon 601 and the "utility” icon 701 are not included in the first control shown in (c) of FIG. 9 as compared with the first control shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (d) of FIG.
  • the display shown in (c) of FIG. 9 The "Settings” icon 601 and the "Utility” icon 701 are included in the display page.
  • the first control 503 is further included in the display page shown in (c) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 may not display the (c) shown in FIG.
  • the page 101 (second page) is displayed, and the display page 102 (first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 10 is displayed; when the user's finger is along the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 10, After the sliding track "1001] is slid from left to right, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of FIG. 10, that is, the display page 101 shown in (c) of FIG. 9 (the Two pages).
  • the second page may be It is the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG.
  • the above second input may be a click operation for the "right shift” button shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 moves the "set" icon 601 and the "utility” icon 701 in the first control 503 to the display in response to the user's click operation on the "right shift” button shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the method of displaying the idle position of the page 103 can refer to the "setting" icon 601 in the first control 503 by referring to the click operation of the mobile phone 100 in response to the user's "left shift” button shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the "Utility” icon 701 is moved to the display of the idle position of the display page 101, which is not described herein again.
  • the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 9 may not be included in the displayed display page. That is, in response to the second input, the terminal may close the first control after moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal.
  • the first control in the embodiment of the present application is displayed on the display page of the terminal (such as the first page), and the terminal may respond to the movement gesture of the first control by the user, and may be displayed on the display page according to the sliding track of the mobile gesture.
  • the first control is displayed by moving, that is, an image in which the first control dynamically moves according to the sliding track is displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 can move the first control 503 according to the sliding track 1101, and display (b) in FIG. The interface shown.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the area of the first control when the application icon and/or the folder icon are included in the first control.
  • the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control 503, and as shown in (b) of FIG. 12, the first control 503 includes a "map".
  • the icon 1201, the area of the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 12 is larger than the area of the first control 503 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the terminal may display a dynamic image in which the area of the first control is changed from small to large.
  • FIG. 10 only give an example of the first control 503, which is the first embodiment of the present application.
  • a control includes, but is not limited to, the first control shown in the above figures.
  • the "left shift” button, the "right shift” button, and the "drop” button may not be included in the first control 1301.
  • the second input may be a sliding operation of the user along the sliding track 1302 on the first control 1301 as shown in (a) of FIG. 13, and the mobile phone 100 may respond to the second input.
  • the first in a control The second icon is displayed to move to the idle position of the first page of the terminal. That is, the display page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 13 is displayed.
  • the second input may be a sliding operation of the user along the sliding track 1402 on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. 14, and the mobile phone 100 may respond to the second input to the first control 1301.
  • the "Weather" icon 1402 is displayed to be displayed at an idle position of the left display page adjacent to the first page.
  • the display page 102 including the "weather" icon 1402 shown in (b) of FIG. 14 is displayed.
  • the second input may be a left-to-right sliding operation of the user on the first control, and the terminal may move the second icon in the first control to be adjacent to the first page in response to the second input.
  • the free display on the right side of the page is displayed.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, and the terminal may start the first control in response to the first instruction, and display an application icon and a file in the display page for managing the terminal on the first page of the terminal. a first control of the icon; and then, in response to the user's first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the first page to the first control; subsequently, the terminal The second icon in the first control is displayed to be displayed on the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the user's second input to the first control.
  • the terminal may implement simultaneous movement of multiple icons (application icons and/or folder icons) on the display page of the terminal by using the first control, and may improve the display page of the mobile terminal. The management efficiency of the application icons.
  • the terminal may not only move all the second icons in the first control to the idleness of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user, as described in the foregoing embodiment. Displayed in position; the terminal may also move the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a portion of the first icon in the first control.
  • the second input may be further configured to select a second icon in the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the terminal.
  • the two pages are displayed in the free position.
  • the second input may be a double-click operation of a second icon in the first control by the user, or the second input may be a long-press operation of the second icon in the first control by the user.
  • the second page is the same as the first page.
  • S403 shown in FIG. 4 may be replaced with S1501:
  • S1501 The terminal moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the second icon in the first control by the user, where the second page is the same as the first page. .
  • the second input may be a double-click operation, a drag operation, or the like of the second icon in the first control by the user.
  • the starting point of the sliding track of the drag operation is the second icon in the first control, and the ending point is the second page.
  • the above second input is a double-click operation of the "utility" icon 701 in the first control shown in (a) of FIG. 16 by the user.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 16 as compared with FIG.
  • the display page shown in (a) includes a "utility” icon 701 in the display page shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the "utility" icon 701 is not included in the first control shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S1701, and the foregoing S403 may be replaced by S1702:
  • the terminal is responsive to a third input of the second icon in the first control by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in a first preset manner.
  • the third input is different from the second input described in S1501.
  • the third input can be used
  • the first preset manner may be a manner of marking a second icon by using a predefined color, a manner of highlighting the second icon, and the like, and the second icon may be displayed differently from other icons in the first control.
  • the specific form of the first preset mode is not described here in this embodiment.
  • the mobile phone 100 can adopt the (b) shown in FIG.
  • the first preset mode displays the selected "Alipay" icon 1801.
  • the terminal moves the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user.
  • the second input described in S1702 may be used to instruct the terminal to display the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, where the second page may be the same as the first page, Can be different.
  • the second input in S1702 reference may be made to the description of the second input in S403 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
  • the mobile phone 100 can select the selected "Alipay” icon shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the 1801 is moved to the idle position of the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18 is displayed.
  • the "Amber” icon 1801 is included in the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18, and the "Alipay” icon 1801 is not included in the first control shown in (c) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can also use the (b) in FIG.
  • the selected "Alipay” icon 1801 is displayed to be displayed on the idle position of the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18 is displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the selected "Alipay” icon 1801 and the "Taobao” icon 1901 in the first preset manner shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can select the selected "Alipay” icon 1801 and the "Taobao” icon 1901 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the display is moved to the idle position of the display page 103 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 19 is displayed.
  • the terminal may, in response to the user selecting the part of the first icon in the first control, move the second icon that is selected to be displayed to the idle position of the second page.
  • the targeted management of the application icons by the terminal can be realized, and the efficiency of the terminal management application icons is improved.
  • the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, where the first side is the left side or Right.
  • the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control.
  • the free position of the second page is not sufficient to display all of the second icons in the first control.
  • M the display pages 102 of the mobile phone 100 as shown in (a) of FIG. 20
  • S403 can be replaced with S2101.
  • S403 shown in FIG. 4 can be replaced with S2101:
  • the terminal responds to the second input of the first control by the user.
  • the terminal sets the M of the first control.
  • the second icon is displayed on the M free positions of the second page, and the remaining NM second icons in the first control are displayed on the idle position of the third page of the terminal.
  • the third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side.
  • the mobile phone 100 can move the "weather” icon 2001 to the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 (ie, the second page). Displayed in the idle position, that is, the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20 is displayed; and the "shared bicycle” icon 2002 is moved to the idle position of the display page 101 (ie, the third page) of the mobile phone 100. Displayed on.
  • the third page may also be the first page. That is, when the user clicks the "left shift” button 506 in the first page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 20, the mobile phone 100 can move the "weather" icon 2001 to the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 (ie, Displayed in the idle position of the two pages), that is, the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20 is displayed; and the "shared bicycle” icon 2002 is moved to the display page 103 (ie, the first page) of the mobile phone 100. Displayed in the idle position.
  • the terminal may also switch the display of the mobile phone 100 in response to the fourth input of the first page by the user.
  • the page displays the first control on the displayed page after switching (ie, the second page).
  • the method in this embodiment may further include S2201:
  • S2201 The terminal displays, in response to the fourth input of the first page by the user, a first control including a first icon, where the fourth input is used to switch the display page of the terminal.
  • the fourth input may be a left-to-right sliding operation of the user on the display page of the terminal, or a right-to-left sliding operation by the user on the display page of the terminal.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display (c) of FIG.
  • the displayed display page that is, the current display page of the mobile phone 100 is switched from the display page 103 (ie, the first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 22 (ie, Two pages).
  • the idle position of the second page may exist.
  • the number M is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control.
  • the free position of the second page is not sufficient to display all of the second icons in the first control.
  • the above S403 can be replaced with S2101.
  • the first control displayed on the top includes two second icons (ie, "weather” icon 2001 and "shared bicycle” icon 2002); thus, when the user clicks the "drop” button shown in (c) of FIG. 22 After 505, the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 is insufficient to display the "weather” icon 2001 and the "shared bicycle” icon 2002.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the "weather" icon 2001, to the idle position of the display page 102 (ie, the second page) of the mobile phone 100, that is, display the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20;
  • the "shared bicycle” icon 2002 is moved to the idle position of the display page 101 (ie, the third page) of the mobile phone 100.
  • the terminal may display a part of the second icon on the second page when the target display page of the second icon (ie, the second page) is insufficient to display all the second icons,
  • the remaining second icon displays a third page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or displays the remaining second icon on the first page.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon. As shown in FIG. 23, the method for moving an application icon includes S2301-S2303:
  • the terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start The first control.
  • S2302 The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control in response to the first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, where the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
  • the terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the first display position for display according to the second input of the user to the first display position on the first page.
  • the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control; the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position; the third icon is an application icon or a file a folder icon; the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  • the first display location is an idle location.
  • the terminal may directly move the second icon in the first control to the first display position in response to the second input of the first display position on the first page by the user.
  • the second icon may be an application icon or a folder icon that is moved to the first control in the first control.
  • the idle page 2401 ie, the first display position
  • the mobile phone 100 may display the "weather" icon 2001 in the first control (ie, the first control, the first one is moved to the application icon or the folder icon in the first control) Moving to the idle position 2401 is displayed, that is, the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 24 is displayed.
  • the second icon is an application icon or folder selected by the user from among the first controls.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S2501:
  • the terminal is configured to respond to the third input of the second icon by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and display the second icon in the first control by using the first preset manner.
  • the mobile phone 100 when the user clicks the "Alipay” icon 1801 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the method shown in (b) of FIG. 25B.
  • the first preset mode displays the selected "Alipay” icon 1801.
  • the mobile phone 100 can execute S2303, that is, after the user clicks on the idle position 2501 (ie, the first display position) shown in (b) of FIG. 25B, the mobile phone 100 can display the "Alipay" icon 1801 in the first control ( That is, the user moves from the application icon or folder selected in the first control to the idle position 2501, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 25B is displayed.
  • the first display position is not an idle position, and the third display icon is displayed on the first display position.
  • the first display position may be a display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601, and a third icon (ie, the QQ icon 2601) is displayed on the display position.
  • the second icon may be an application icon or a folder icon
  • the third icon may be an application icon or a folder icon.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S2601:
  • S2601 The terminal moves the third icon from the first display position to the first control in response to the second input of the user to the first display position.
  • the mobile phone 100 can execute S2501, that is, when the user clicks the "utility” icon 701 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the map.
  • the first preset mode shown in (b) of 27 displays the selected "utility” icon 701.
  • the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously execute S2303 and S2601 in response to the second input of the user to the first display position, that is, when the user clicks the display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 may move the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the application icon or folder selected by the user from the first control) in the first control to the display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601.
  • the QQ icon 2601 ie, the third icon
  • the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 27 is displayed.
  • the third icon is displayed on the first display location, and the third icon is a folder icon, and the second icon is an application icon.
  • the terminal may move the second icon in the first control to display in the folder icon displayed on the first display position in response to the user's second input to the first display position.
  • S2601 shown in FIG. 26 can be replaced with S2801:
  • S2801 The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the folder icon displayed on the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position.
  • the mobile phone 100 may execute S2501, that is, when the user clicks the "Alipay” icon 1801 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 may adopt FIG.
  • the first preset mode shown in (b) of the middle displays the selected "Alipay” icon 1801.
  • the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously execute S2303 and S2801 in response to the user's second input to the first display position, that is, when the user's finger clicks on the display position corresponding to the "finance" icon 2901 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 may move the “Alipay” icon 1801 in the first control (ie, the application icon selected by the user from the first control) to the “Financial” icon 2901, that is, FIG. 29 is displayed.
  • the "finance” shown in (c) of FIG. 29 is compared with the "finance” icon 2901 shown in (a) of FIG. 29 and the "finance” icon 2901 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • An "Alipay” icon 1801 is also included in the icon 2901.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 2902 shown in (d) of FIG. 29, which includes not only "business The Bank icon, the Bank of China icon, and the Alipay icon.
  • the terminal may start the first control in response to the first instruction, and display an application icon and a folder in the display page for managing the terminal on the first page of the terminal. a first control of the icon; then, in response to the user's first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the first page to the first control; subsequently, the terminal
  • the second icon in the first control may be targeted to the first display position in the second page in response to the second input of the first display position in the target display page (ie, the second page) by the user. . That is, the terminal can selectively move the second icon in the first control to the display position specified by the user in the second page, thereby realizing precise movement of the application icon or the folder icon.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon. As shown in FIG. 30, the method for moving an application icon includes S3001-S3004:
  • the terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate the The terminal starts the first control.
  • the terminal may display the first control 1301 as shown in (a) of FIG. 14 in response to the first instruction.
  • the terminal may display the first control 3101 as shown in (a) of FIG. 31, the first control 3101 being compared to the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG. It includes not only a "control storage area” 504, a "drop” button 505, a "left shift” button 506, and a “right shift” button 507, but also a "folder” button 3101.
  • the "folder” button 3101 is for displaying at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control.
  • S3002 The terminal displays at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user.
  • the at least one folder icon in the terminal may include: a folder icon in all display pages in the terminal, or a folder icon of a current display page (such as a first page) of the terminal.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the following is a description of the method in the embodiment of the present application, in which the "at least one folder icon in the terminal" includes all the display interface folder icons in the terminal as an example.
  • the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and the mobile phone 100 includes three display pages. That is, the page 101, the display page 102, and the display page 103 are displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 includes two folder icons: a "utility" icon 701 and a "finance" icon 2901.
  • the first input in S3002 may be that the user inputs a preset gesture on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the user's first input to the first control may be that the user inputs a sliding trajectory from bottom to top on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the first input is different from the second input of the first control by the user in S403.
  • the first input in S3002 may also be a click operation, such as a click operation, by the user on the "folder" button 3101 in the first control 3101 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • a click operation by the user on the "folder" button 3101 in the first control 3101 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can be displayed in the first control 503. "Utilities" icon 701 and "Finance” icon 2901.
  • the terminal responds to a second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, and the selected first file is displayed in a first preset manner. Clip icon.
  • the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user may be a click operation of the first folder icon by the user.
  • the second input may be a user click operation of the "utility" icon 701 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the first preset mode in the S3003 reference may be made to the first preset mode in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not repeatedly described herein.
  • the mobile phone 100 can adopt the first pre-show shown in (c) of FIG. Set the mode to display the "Utility” icon 701.
  • the terminal moves the first icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the third input of the first icon in the first page by the user.
  • the third input of the first icon displayed by the user on the first page may be a click operation of the first icon by the user.
  • the third input may be a click operation of the user on the "shared bicycle” icon 3201 shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can move the "shared bicycle” icon 3201 to the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the first The folder icon is displayed in the corresponding folder, that is, the display page shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3202 shown in (c) of FIG. 32, which includes not only the folder window 3202
  • the Clock icon, Memo icon, Calendar icon, and Compass icon also include the Shared Bike icon.
  • the terminal may display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user.
  • the user can view the plurality of folder icons in the terminal in the first control, and selectively move the first icon in the first page to the folder icon selected by the user (ie, the first folder)
  • the icon corresponds to the folder).
  • the terminal may further expand and display an application icon in the folder corresponding to the folder icon in response to the user inputting any one of the at least one folder icon.
  • the method in this embodiment may further include S3301:
  • S3301 The terminal displays an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to the fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user.
  • the fourth input is different from the second input described in S3003.
  • the second input described in S3003 is a click operation of the user on any one of the at least one folder icon
  • the fourth input may be any file in the user to the at least one folder icon. Double-click the icon or press and hold.
  • the mobile phone 100 may display an application icon in a folder corresponding to the "finance" icon 2901, such as The “ICBC” icon, the “Bank of China” icon, and the "Alipay” icon in the folder window 3401 shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the terminal may also be moved by the first page to be displayed in the first control in response to the user's fifth input to any icon (eg, the second icon) in the first page.
  • the method in this embodiment may further include S3501:
  • S3501 The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control in response to the fifth input of the second icon in the first page by the user, where the second icon is an application icon in the first page or Folder icon.
  • the terminal responds to the fifth input of the second icon in the first page by the user, the second icon is moved from the first page to the first control” in S3501, reference may be made to the terminal “responsive to the terminal in S402”. a method in which the user inputs the first icon in the first page, the first icon is moved from the first page to the first control, the method shown in FIG. 6, and the display page shown in FIG.
  • the application examples are not described in detail herein.
  • the terminal may further move the selected third icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user.
  • the sixth input is for selecting a third icon from an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S3502:
  • the terminal is responsive to a sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user, the sixth input is used to select the third icon from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control, and the selected The three icons are displayed in the folder corresponding to the first folder icon.
  • the sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user may be a click operation of the third icon by the user.
  • the sixth input described above may be a user's click operation on the "shared bicycle” icon 3201 shown in (a) of FIG. 36A.
  • the mobile phone 100 can move the "shared bicycle” icon 3201 to the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the first The folder icon is displayed in the corresponding folder, that is, the display page shown in FIG. 36A(b) is displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3202 shown in (c) of FIG. 36A, which includes not only " The Clock icon, Memo icon, Calendar icon, and Compass icon also include the Shared Bike icon.
  • the first control 503 includes the following third icons: a "weather” icon, an "Alipay” icon, and a "social” icon 3601, and the mobile phone 100 adopts a first preset manner.
  • the Utility icon is displayed.
  • the mobile phone 100 may merge the folder corresponding to the "social" icon 3601 (ie, the icon of the folder) into the folder corresponding to the "utility” 3604, and display The display page shown in (b) of Fig. 36B. For example, when the user clicks on the "real" shown in (b) of FIG.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3605 shown in (c) of FIG. 36B, which includes not only the "clock” icon, the "memo” icon, the "calendar” icon, and the “compass”. "icon, also includes the "WeChat” icon.
  • the terminal may further respond to the first input of the first control by the user, as shown in (b) of FIG. 31, (c) of FIG. 31 or (a) of FIG. 37, in the first control.
  • a new folder icon 3102 is displayed in 503, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S3701-S3703:
  • S3701 The terminal displays a new folder icon in the first control in response to the user's first input to the first control.
  • S3702 The terminal displays a folder name input item of the new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the new folder icon.
  • the user input to the newly created folder icon may be a click operation performed by the user on the newly created folder icon, such as a click operation.
  • a click operation For example, when the user clicks the new folder icon 3102 shown in (a) of FIG. 37, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 37, and the display shown in (b) of FIG. The page includes a "folder name input item" 3701 and an "input keyboard" 3702 for inputting the name of the above new folder in the "folder name input item" 3701.
  • the terminal displays the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (d) of FIG. In the display page shown in (d) of FIG. 37, a "social" icon 3704 is added to the first control 503, and a “social” icon 3703 is added to the first page 103.
  • the terminal may also automatically search for a folder name that matches the name of the application according to the name of the application corresponding to the application icon selected by the user.
  • the corresponding folder name of the application “WeChat”, “QQ”, etc. may be “social”
  • the corresponding folder name of the application “Alipay”, “Bank of China”, “China Merchants Bank”, etc. may be “finance”.
  • the corresponding folder name of the application “Iqiyi", “Youku”, etc. can be "video”.
  • the first page 103 includes a "social” icon 3805.
  • the "social” icon 3805 includes a "WeChat” icon 3801.
  • the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3806 shown in (d) of FIG. 38, which includes "WeChat” in the folder window 3806. Icon 3801.
  • the method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application can not only avoid the need for the user to frequently switch the display page of the terminal when the first icon is moved to a certain folder, so as to find the problem of the target folder and improve the problem.
  • the management efficiency of the application icon it is also possible to create a new folder on the display page of the terminal through the first control.
  • the above terminal and the like include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the embodiments of the present invention can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in combination with the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the embodiments of the invention.
  • the embodiment of the present application may perform the division of the function modules on the terminal or the like according to the foregoing method example.
  • each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present invention is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner.
  • FIG. 39 shows a possible structural diagram of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment, and the terminal 3900 includes an input unit 3901 and a display unit 3902.
  • the input unit 3901 is configured to receive input of a user on a display page of the terminal, such as a first input, a second input, a third input, etc., and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the input unit 3901 can be configured to receive a first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, and receive a second input from the user to the first control.
  • the display unit 3902 is configured to support S401-S403, S1501, S1701-S1702, S2101, S2201, S2301-S2303, S2501, S2601, S2801, S3001-S3004, S3301, S3501-S3502, S3701-S3703 in the terminal method embodiment, And/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the terminal 3900 includes, but is not limited to, the unit modules listed above.
  • the terminal 3900 may further include a storage unit for storing related data of each application in the terminal, such as each application displayed by the display unit 3901. The icon of the program, the icon of the first control, etc.
  • the terminal 3900 may further include a transmitting unit for transmitting data or signals to other devices, a receiving unit that receives data or signals transmitted by other devices, and the like.
  • the terminal 3900 may further include a calculating unit, configured to calculate touch point coordinates corresponding to the input of the page or the first control displayed by the display unit.
  • the functions that can be implemented by the foregoing functional units include, but are not limited to, the functions corresponding to the method steps described in the foregoing examples.
  • FIG. 40 shows a possible structural diagram of the terminal involved in the above embodiment.
  • the terminal 4000 includes a processing module 4001, a storage module 4002, and a display module 4003.
  • the processing module 4001 is configured to control and manage the actions of the electronic device.
  • the display module 4003 is configured to display an image generated by the processing module 4001.
  • the storage module 4002 is configured to save program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the terminal 4000 may further include a communication module 4004, which is used to support the terminal and other networks. Body communication.
  • the processing module 4001 may be a processor or a controller, for example, may be a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), and an application specific integrated circuit (Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It is possible to implement or carry out the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the communication module 1303 may be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a communication interface, or the like.
  • the storage module 1301 may be a memory.
  • the processing module 4001 is a processor (such as the processor 380 shown in FIG. 3)
  • the communication module 4004 is an RF transceiver circuit (such as the RF circuit 310 shown in FIG. 3)
  • the storage module 4002 is a memory (as shown in FIG. 3).
  • the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be the terminal 100 shown in FIG.
  • the communication module 4004 may include not only an RF transceiver circuit but also a WiFi module and a Bluetooth module. Communication modules such as RF transceiver circuits, WiFi modules, and Bluetooth modules can be collectively referred to as communication interfaces.
  • the above processor, communication interface, touch screen and storage area can be coupled together by a bus.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a graphical user interface (GUI) stored in a terminal, the terminal including a touch screen, a memory, and one or more A processor for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the GUI includes: displaying a first page including a first control on the touch screen, as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, the first page may be any one of a plurality of pages included in the terminal One. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 6 or (a)-(b) of FIG.
  • the first on the touch screen The icon is moved from a page to a first control, the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page.
  • the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page.
  • FIG. 8 in response to the second input to the first control, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the touch screen on the touch screen,
  • the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  • the second page is the same as the first page, and the second input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display.
  • the GUI further includes: in response to the second input of the second icon in the first control by the user, as shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 16, moving the selected second icon to the first screen on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: before moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first control, as shown in FIG. 18 (a)-(b) or (a)-(b) in FIG. 19, in response to a third input to the second icon in the first control, the third input is used to select from the first control a second icon, displaying the selected second icon on the touch screen in a first preset manner; moving the selected second icon on the touch screen to the second page of the terminal in response to the second input to the first control Displayed in an idle position, wherein the second input is different from the third input.
  • the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side.
  • the above GUI also includes: (a)-(d) in FIG. Or (a)-(c) in FIG. 22, in response to the second input to the first control, when the number M of idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control Moving the M second icons in the first control to the M free positions of the second page on the touch screen, and moving the remaining NM icons in the first control to the touch screen on the touch screen.
  • the third page is displayed on the free location.
  • the third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  • the GUI further includes: floating the first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: in accordance with (a)-(b) in FIG. 11, in response to the moving gesture to the first control, moving the display on the first page displayed on the touch screen according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture The first control.
  • the area of the first control displayed on the touch screen is smaller than the area of the first page displayed on the touch screen.
  • the GUI further includes: moving the first icon from the first page to the display in the first control in response to the first input, and displaying the dynamic image that the first icon is gradually reduced on the touch screen.
  • the area of the first control is smaller than the application icon and/or included in the first control. Or the area of the first control when the folder icon.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a graphical user interface (GUI) stored in a terminal, the terminal including a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the one or more processors are for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory.
  • the GUI includes: as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, in response to the first instruction, displaying a first page including the first control on the touch screen, the first page may be a Home screen of the terminal, or may be Other display pages of the terminal. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 6 or (a)-(b) of FIG.
  • the first on the touch screen The icon is moved from a page to a first control, the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page.
  • the second icon in the first control in response to the user's second input to the first display position on the second page, moving the second icon in the first control to the first display position
  • the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control
  • the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position
  • the third icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
  • the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon that is moved to the first control in the first control.
  • the GUI further includes: in response to the third input to the second icon, the third input is used to select the second one from the first control, as shown in (a) of FIG. 25B The icon displays the second icon in the first control in a first preset manner on the touch screen.
  • a third icon is displayed on the first display position, the third icon may be an application icon, or the third icon may be a folder icon.
  • the GUI further includes: displaying the third icon on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first display position, as shown in (a)-(c) of FIG. Moving from the first display position to the first control.
  • a third icon is displayed on the first display position, and the third icon is a folder icon.
  • the GUI may further include: in the first control on the touch screen, in response to the second input to the first display position, as shown in (a)-(d) of FIG. The second icon is moved to display in the third icon displayed on the first display position.
  • a user interface (GUI), the GUI being stored in a terminal, the terminal comprising a touch screen, a memory, one or more processors for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory.
  • the GUI includes: as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, in response to the first instruction, displaying a first page including the first control on the touch screen, the first page may be a Home screen of the terminal, or may be Other display pages of the terminal.
  • the first page may be a Home screen of the terminal, or may be Other display pages of the terminal.
  • at least one of the touch screens is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
  • the second input is used to select the first folder icon, using the first In a preset manner, the selected first folder icon is displayed on the touch screen.
  • the third input to the first icon in the first page moving the first icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen display.
  • the GUI further includes: displaying the second file on the touch screen in response to the fourth input to the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, as shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 34
  • the application icon in the folder corresponding to the folder icon, the fourth input is different from the second input.
  • the GUI further includes: displaying (1)-(d) in FIG. 37 or (a)-(d) in FIG. 38, displaying on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control
  • the new folder icon is displayed in the first control, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the input of the newly created folder icon, the folder name of the new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
  • the input item in response to the user inputting the folder name input item, displaying the named new folder icon in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium, where the computer program code is stored, and when the processor executes the computer program code, the terminal executes FIG. 4, FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 21, and FIG. 23.
  • FIG. 4 FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 21, and FIG. 23.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to execute FIG. 4, FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 21, FIG. 23, FIG. 25A, FIG. 26, FIG.
  • the method of the related method in any of FIG. 30, FIG. 33 and FIG. 35 implements the method of moving the application icon in the above embodiment.
  • the terminal 3900, the terminal 4000, the computer storage medium or the computer program product provided by the embodiment of the present invention are all used to perform the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be referred to the above provided. The beneficial effects in the corresponding methods are not described here.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be used. Combinations can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be The indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the medium includes instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a flash memory, a mobile hard disk, a read only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes.

Abstract

A method for moving application icons, and a terminal, relating to the field of electronic technology, being able to move at least two application icons simultaneously, improving the efficiency of managing application icons on a display page. The specific solution comprises: a terminal displaying a first widget on a first page of the terminal in response to a first instruction, the first widget being used to manage application icons and folder icons displayed by the terminal, the first instruction being used to instruct the terminal to start the first widget (S401); in response to a first input to a first icon in the first page by a user, moving the first icon from the first page into the first widget for display, the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page (S402); and in response to a second input to the first widget by the user, moving a second icon in the first widget to a vacant position in a second page of the terminal for display (S403), the second icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first widget.

Description

一种移动应用图标的方法及终端Method and terminal for mobile application icon 技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种移动应用图标的方法及终端。The embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of electronic technologies, and in particular, to a method and a terminal for moving an application icon.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动终端的普及,移动终端的性能的提高,移动终端的存储空间的扩大,移动终端中可以安装的应用越来越多。当移动终端中安装了较多的应用时,该移动终端的显示页面上则可以显示较多的应用图标,用户则需要对这些应用图标进行管理。With the popularization of mobile terminals, the performance of mobile terminals is improved, and the storage space of mobile terminals is expanding, more and more applications can be installed in mobile terminals. When more applications are installed in the mobile terminal, more display icons can be displayed on the display page of the mobile terminal, and the user needs to manage the application icons.
例如,用户可以通过长按某个应用图标,然后拖动该应用图标至显示页面的空闲位置,以实现该应用图标的移动。但是,存在的问题是,逐个移动多个应用图标的操作繁琐,人机交互性能较差。For example, the user can move the application icon by long pressing an application icon and then dragging the application icon to the idle position of the display page. However, there is a problem in that the operation of moving a plurality of application icons one by one is cumbersome and the human-computer interaction performance is poor.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法及终端,可以同时移动至少两个应用图标,提高显示页面上的应用图标的管理效率。The embodiment of the present invention provides a method and a terminal for moving an application icon, which can simultaneously move at least two application icons to improve management efficiency of an application icon on the display page.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,该方法包括:终端响应于第一指令,在该终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理终端显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件;响应于用户对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第一图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;响应于用户对上述第一控件的第二输入,将该第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,该第二图标是第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, the method includes: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the terminal display, in response to the first instruction An application icon and a folder icon, the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to activate the first control; and the first icon is moved by the first page in response to the user inputting the first icon in the first page Displaying in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to a second input by the user to the first control, the first one in the first control The second icon is displayed on the idle position of the second page of the terminal, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
其中,通过本申请实施例提供的方案,终端可以通过第一控件实现该终端的显示页面上的多个图标(应用图标和/或文件夹图标)的同时移动,可以提高移动终端的显示页面上的应用图标的管理效率。In the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may implement simultaneous movement of multiple icons (application icons and/or folder icons) on the display page of the terminal by using the first control, and may improve the display page of the mobile terminal. The management efficiency of the application icons.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述第二页面与上述第一页面相同,上述第二输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,并指示终端将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。上述“终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示”包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In a possible design method, the second page is the same as the first page, the second input is used to select a second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the second Displayed on the free location of the page. The above “the terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user” includes: the terminal responds to the user in the first control The second input of the second icon moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display.
本申请实施例中,终端不仅可以如上述实施例所述,响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将该第一控件中的所有第二图标都移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示;该终端还可以响应于用户对该第一控件中的部分第一图标的选择,针对性的将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may not only move all the second icons in the first control to the idle position of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user, as described in the foregoing embodiment. The terminal may also be configured to move the second icon selected to be moved to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a portion of the first icon in the first control.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示”本申请实施例的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,该第三 输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标。相应的,上述“终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示”包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,上述第二输入与第三输入不同。In another possible design method, in the above “terminal, in response to a second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idleness of the second page of the terminal The method of the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the third input of the second icon in the first control by the user, the third The input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in the first preset manner. Correspondingly, the foregoing “displaying, by the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal” includes: the terminal responding to the first control by the user The second input moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal for display. The second input is different from the third input.
本申请实施例中,终端可以响应于用户对该第一控件中的部分第一图标的选择,针对性的将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示,可以实现终端对应用图标的针对性管理,提高了终端管理应用图标的效率。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may move the second icon that is selected to be displayed to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a part of the first icon in the first control, and the terminal may be implemented. The targeted management of the application icons improves the efficiency of the terminal management application icons.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第二页面与第一页面不同,且该第二页面是在第一侧与第一页面相邻的显示页面,该第一侧是左侧或者右侧。上述“终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示”包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,当第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,终端将第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并将第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至终端的第三页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,上述第三页面是在上述第一侧与第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者第三页面是上述第一页面。In another possible design method, the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side. . The above “terminal responds to the second input of the first control by the user, and moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal”, including: the terminal responds to the user a second input of the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the terminal moves the M second icons in the first control to the first The M pages of the two pages are displayed, and the remaining NM icons in the first control are displayed to be displayed in the idle position of the third page of the terminal. The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
其中,本申请实施例中,终端可以在第二图标的目标显示页面(即第二页面)不足以显示所有的第二图标时,将部分第二图标显示在第二页面,将剩余的第二图标显示在第一侧与第二页面相邻的第三页面,或者将剩余的第二图标显示在第一页面。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may display a part of the second icon on the second page when the target display page of the second icon (ie, the second page) is insufficient to display all the second icons, and the remaining second The icon displays a third page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or displays the remaining second icon on the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二桌面的空闲位置上显示”之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括:终端响应于用户对第一桌面的第四输入,显示包括第一控件的第二桌面,该第一控件包括第一图标,该第四输入用于切换终端的显示页面。In another possible design method, before the “terminal is displayed in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second desktop of the terminal”, The method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: displaying, by the terminal, a second desktop including the first control, the first control includes a first icon, and the fourth input is used to switch the terminal, in response to the fourth input of the first desktop by the user Display page.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,该方法包括:终端响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件;响应于用户对该第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将该第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;响应于用户对第二页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示,该第二图标是第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;该第一显示位置是空闲位置,或者该第一显示位置上显示有第三图标;该第三图标是应用图标或者文件夹图标。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, the method comprising: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage display of the terminal, in response to the first instruction An application icon and a folder icon in the page, the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start the first control; in response to the first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, the first icon is used by the first page Moving to display in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to the second input of the user to the first display position on the second page, the first in the first control The second icon is moved to display on the first display position, the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control; the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position; The third icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
在本申请实施例中,终端可以选择性的将第一控件中的第二图标,移动至第二页面中用户指定的显示位置,实现了应用图标或者文件夹图标的精确移动。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may selectively move the second icon in the first control to the display position specified by the user in the second page, thereby realizing accurate movement of the application icon or the folder icon.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述第二图标是上述第一控件中、第一个被移动至该第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。在这种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于用户对第二页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示”之前,本申请实施例的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对第二图标的第三输入,该第三输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,采用第一预设方式在上述第一控件中显示该第二图标。 In a possible design method, the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon of the first control that is moved to the first control. In this possible design method, before the "terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the first display position in response to the user's second input to the first display position on the second page" The method of the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the third input of the second icon by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and adopting the first preset manner in the first control The second icon is displayed in .
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一显示位置上显示有第三图标,该第三图标可以是应用图标,或者该第三图标可以是文件夹图标。在这种可能的设计方法中,上述方法还包括:终端响应于用户对上述第一显示位置的第二输入,将该第三图标由上述第一显示位置移动至第一控件中显示。即在这种可能的设计方法中,无论第三图标是应用图标或者文件夹图标,当终端检测到用户对该第三图标的第二输入后,该终端可以都将该第三图标由上述第一显示位置移动至第一控件中显示,并将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示。In another possible design method, the third display icon is displayed on the first display position, the third icon may be an application icon, or the third icon may be a folder icon. In this possible design method, the method further includes: the terminal moving the third icon from the first display position to the first control in response to the second input of the first display position by the user. That is, in this possible design method, whether the third icon is an application icon or a folder icon, when the terminal detects the second input of the third icon by the user, the terminal may use the third icon by the foregoing A display position is moved to the display in the first control, and the second icon in the first control is moved to the first display position for display.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一显示位置上显示有第三图标,该第三图标是文件夹图标。在这种可能的设计方法中,上述“终端响应于用户对第二页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示”包括:终端响应于用户对第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示的第三图标中显示。即在这种可能的设计方法中,如果第三图标是文件夹图标,那么当终端检测到用户对该第三图标的第二输入后,该终端则可以将第一控件中的第二图标移动至该文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In another possible design method, a third icon is displayed on the first display position, and the third icon is a folder icon. In this possible design method, the above “terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position on the second page” includes: The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the third icon displayed on the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position. That is, in this possible design method, if the third icon is a folder icon, the terminal may move the second icon in the first control after the terminal detects the second input of the third icon by the user. Displayed in the folder corresponding to the folder icon.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,该方法包括:终端响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理所述终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件;响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在第一控件中显示终端中的至少一个文件夹图标;响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,该第二输入用于选择第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标;响应于用户对第一页面上显示的第一图标的第三输入,将第一图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, where the method includes: displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the terminal, in response to the first instruction Displaying an application icon and a folder icon in the page, the first instruction is for instructing the terminal to start the first control; in response to the first input of the first control by the user, displaying at least one folder in the terminal in the first control An icon in response to a second input by the user to the first folder icon of the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, and the selected first folder is displayed in a first preset manner Icon; in response to the user's third input of the first icon displayed on the first page, moving the first icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
本申请实施例中,终端可以响应于用户对该第一控件的第一输入,在该第一控件中显示该终端中的至少一个文件夹图标。如此,用户便可以在该第一控件中查看到该终端中的多个文件夹图标,并选择性的将第一页面中的第一图标移动至用户选择的文件夹图标(即第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹)中显示。通过本方案,可以避免在将第一图标移动至某个文件夹时,需要用户频繁的切换终端的显示页面,以查找目标文件夹的问题,可以提高应用图标的管理效率。In this embodiment, the terminal may display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user. In this way, the user can view the plurality of folder icons in the terminal in the first control, and selectively move the first icon in the first page to the folder icon selected by the user (ie, the first folder) The icon corresponds to the folder). With this solution, when the first icon is moved to a certain folder, the user needs to frequently switch the display page of the terminal to find the target folder, and the management efficiency of the application icon can be improved.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在第一控件中显示终端中的至少一个文件夹图标”之后,本申请实施例的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,显示第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标,该第四输入与上述第二输入不同。In another possible design method, after the “terminal in response to the first input of the first control by the user, the at least one folder icon in the terminal is displayed in the first control”, the method of the embodiment of the present application further The method includes: in response to the fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the terminal displays an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon, the fourth input being different from the second input.
在一种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件”之后,本申请实施例的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,将第二图标由所述第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第二图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。在上述“终端响应于用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标”之后,本申请实施例的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,该第六输入用于从第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择所述 第三图标,将被选择的第三图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In a possible design method, after the “terminal displays the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction”, the method in the embodiment of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the user The fifth input of the second icon in the page moves the second icon from the first page to the first control, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page. After the terminal displays the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the user's second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the embodiment of the present application The method also includes the terminal responding to a sixth input by the user to a third icon in the first control, the sixth input for selecting the application icon or folder icon from the first control The third icon moves the selected third icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,在上述“终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件”之后,本申请的方法还包括:终端响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,该新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;响应于用户对所述新建文件夹图标的输入,在所述第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;响应于用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入,在所述第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。In another possible design method, after the “terminal displays the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction”, the method of the present application further includes: the terminal responding to the first a first input of the control, displaying a new folder icon in the first control, the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the user inputting the newly created folder icon, displaying a new in the first control a folder name entry of the folder icon; in response to the user inputting the folder name entry, displaying the named new folder icon in the first control.
本申请实施例提供的移动应用图标的方法,不仅可以避免在将第一图标移动至某个文件夹时,需要用户频繁的切换终端的显示页面,以查找目标文件夹的问题,提高应用图标的管理效率;还可以通过第一控件,在终端的显示页面上新建文件夹。The method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application can prevent the user from frequently switching the display page of the terminal to find the target folder and improve the application icon when moving the first icon to a certain folder. Management efficiency; you can also create a new folder on the terminal's display page through the first control.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的设计方法中所述的第一控件悬浮显示在第一页面上。In another possible design method, the first control described in the above first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, and possible design methods thereof is displayed on the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的设计方法中所述的第一控件能够在所述第一页面上移动。In another possible design method, the first control described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and its possible design method can be moved on the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的设计方法中所述的第一控件的面积小于所述第一页面的面积。In another possible design method, the area of the first control described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the possible design method thereof is smaller than the area of the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的设计方法中所述的第一图标在由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件的过程中逐渐变小。In another possible design method, the first icon described in the above first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, and possible design method thereof is moved by the first page to the first control The process gradually becomes smaller.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,当第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的设计方法中所述的第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,所述第一控件的面积小于所述第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时所述第一控件的面积。In another possible design method, when the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the possible design method thereof, The area of the first control is smaller than the area of the first control when the first icon includes an application icon and/or a folder icon.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种终端,该终端包括:显示单元和输入单元。其中,显示单元,用于响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,第一控件用于管理显示单元显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件;输入单元,用于接收用户对显示单元显示的第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入;显示单元,还用于响应于第一输入,将第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,第一图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;输入单元,还用于接收用户对第一控件的第二输入;显示单元,还用于响应于第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,第二图标是第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a display unit and an input unit. The display unit is configured to display, according to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the display unit, and the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start a first control; an input unit, configured to receive a first input of a first icon in a first page displayed by the display unit; and a display unit, configured to move the first icon from the first page in response to the first input Displaying in the first control, the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; the input unit is further configured to receive a second input of the first control by the user; the display unit is further configured to respond to the second Inputting, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元显示的第二页面与显示单元显示的第一页面相同,输入单元接收的第二输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,并指示终端将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In a possible design method, the second page displayed by the display unit is the same as the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second input received by the input unit is used to select the second icon from the first control, and indicates that the terminal will The selected second icon is moved to the idle position of the second page for display. a display unit, configured to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, including: a display unit, configured to respond to the user The second input of the second icon in the first control moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述输入单元,还用于在显示单元将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前,接收用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入。显示单元,还用于响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输 入,第三输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标。其中,显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,输入单元接收的第二输入与输入单元接收的第三输入不同。In another possible design method, the input unit is further configured to receive the user in the first control before the display unit moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal. The third input of the second icon. a display unit, further configured to respond to the user's third input to the second icon in the first control The third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in the first preset manner. The display unit is configured to: in response to the second input of the first control by the user, move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including: a display unit, configured to respond to The second input of the first control by the user moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal for display. The second input received by the input unit is different from the third input received by the input unit.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元显示的第二页面与显示单元显示的第一页面不同,且第二页面是在第一侧与第一页面相邻的显示页面,第一侧是左侧或者右侧。显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:显示单元,用于响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,当第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,终端将第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并将第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至终端的第三页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,第三页面是在第一侧与第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者第三页面是第一页面。In another possible design method, the second page displayed by the display unit is different from the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, the first side It is left or right. a display unit, configured to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, including: a display unit, configured to respond to the user a second input of the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the terminal moves the M second icons in the first control to the first The M pages of the two pages are displayed, and the remaining NM icons in the first control are displayed to be displayed in the idle position of the third page of the terminal. The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元,用于将第一控件悬浮显示在第一页面上。In another possible design method, the above display unit is configured to hover the first control on the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述输入单元,还用于接收用户对第一控件的移动手势。显示单元,还用于响应于移动手势,按照移动手势的滑动轨迹在第一页面上移动显示第一控件。In another possible design method, the input unit is further configured to receive a movement gesture of the first control by the user. The display unit is further configured to display the first control on the first page according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture in response to the moving gesture.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元显示的第一控件的面积小于显示单元显示的第一页面的面积。In another possible design method, the area of the first control displayed by the display unit is smaller than the area of the first page displayed by the display unit.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元,还用于在将第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示的过程中,显示第一图标逐渐变小的动态图像。In another possible design method, the display unit is further configured to display a dynamic image in which the first icon gradually becomes smaller during the process of moving the first icon from the first page to the first control.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,当第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,第一控件的面积小于第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时第一控件的面积。In another possible design method, when the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control, the area of the first control is smaller than the first control when the first control includes the application icon and/or the folder icon. Area.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种图形用户界面(Graphical User Interface,GUI),该GUI存储在终端中,该终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,该一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在该存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。该GUI包括:响应于第一指令,在上述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,该第一控件用于管理上述触摸屏显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示处理器启动第一控件;响应于对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,在触摸屏上将第一图标由一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;响应于对上述第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的第二图标移动至触摸屏的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,该第二图标是上述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a graphical user interface (GUI), where the GUI is stored in a terminal, where the terminal includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used by the processor. Executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory. The GUI includes: displaying, in response to the first instruction, a first page including a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the touch screen, the first instruction is used to indicate processing Transmitting the first control; in response to the first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the page to the first control on the touch screen, the first icon being in the first page An application icon or a folder icon; in response to the second input to the first control, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the touch screen on the touch screen, the second icon is An application icon or a folder icon in the above first control.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述第二页面与第一页面相同,第二输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,并指示终端将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。上述GUI还包括:响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,在触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In a possible design method, the second page is the same as the first page, and the second input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the second page. Displayed in the idle position. The GUI further includes: in response to the user's second input to the second icon in the first control, moving the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page on the touch screen.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在响应于对第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前, 响应于对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,第三输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,在触摸屏上采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标;响应于对第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,其中,第二输入与第三输入不同。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first control Before displaying, In response to the third input to the second icon in the first control, the third input is for selecting the second icon from the first control, and displaying the selected second icon in the first preset manner on the touch screen; The second input to the first control is displayed on the touch screen by moving the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page of the terminal, wherein the second input is different from the third input.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述第二页面与第一页面不同,且第二页面是在第一侧与第一页面相邻的显示页面,第一侧是左侧或者右侧。上述GUI还包括:响应于对第一控件的第二输入,当第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并在触摸屏上将第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至触摸屏的第三页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,第三页面是在第一侧与第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者第三页面是第一页面。In another possible design method, the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side. The GUI further includes: in response to the second input to the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the first control is on the touch screen The M second icons are displayed on the M idle positions of the second page, and the remaining NM second icons in the first control are displayed on the touch screen to be displayed on the idle position of the third page of the touch screen. The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在上述触摸屏所显示的第一页面上悬浮显示第一控件。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: floating the first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:响应于对第一控件的移动手势,按照移动手势的滑动轨迹,在触摸屏所显示的第一页面上移动显示第一控件。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: in response to the moving gesture to the first control, moving the displayed first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件的面积小于在触摸屏上显示的第一页面的面积。In another possible design method, the area of the first control displayed on the touch screen is smaller than the area of the first page displayed on the touch screen.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在响应于第一输入,将第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示的过程中,在触摸屏上显示第一图标逐渐变小的动态图像。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: moving the first icon from the first page to the display in the first control in response to the first input, and displaying the first icon on the touch screen gradually changes Small dynamic image.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,当第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,第一控件的面积小于第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时第一控件的面积。In another possible design method, when the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control, the area of the first control is smaller than the first control when the first control includes the application icon and/or the folder icon. Area.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种终端,该终端包括:显示单元和输入单元。其中,显示单元,用于响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,第一控件用于管理终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件。输入单元,用于接收用户对第一控件的第一输入。显示单元,还用于响应于第一输入,在第一控件中显示终端中的至少一个文件夹图标。输入单元,还用于接收用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,第二输入用于选择第一文件夹图标。显示单元,还用于响应于第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标。输入单元,还用于接收用户对第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入。显示单元,还用于响应于第三输入,将第一图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a display unit and an input unit. The display unit is configured to display, according to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage the application icon and the folder icon in the display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate The terminal starts the first control. And an input unit, configured to receive a first input of the first control by the user. The display unit is further configured to display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input. The input unit is further configured to receive a second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, and the second input is used to select the first folder icon. The display unit is further configured to display the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input. The input unit is further configured to receive a third input of the first icon in the first page by the user. The display unit is further configured to move the first icon to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the third input.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述输入单元,还用于在显示单元响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在第一控件中显示终端中的至少一个文件夹图标之后,接收用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,第四输入与第二输入不同。显示单元,还用于响应于第四输入,显示第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标。In a possible design method, the input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control, in response to the first input of the first control by the user, receiving the user pair a fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the fourth input being different from the second input. The display unit is further configured to display an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to the fourth input.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述输入单元,还用于在显示单元响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,接收用户对第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,第二图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。显示单元,还用于响应于第 五输入,将第二图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示。输入单元,还用于在显示单元响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标之后,接收用户对第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,第六输入用于从第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择第三图标。显示单元,还用于响应于第六输入,将被选择的第三图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In another possible design method, the input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays the first control on the first page of the terminal, in response to the first instruction, receive the second icon in the first page by the user. The fifth input, the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page. Display unit, also used to respond to the first Five inputs move the second icon from the first page to the first control. The input unit is further configured to: after the display unit displays the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, receiving the user pair A sixth input of the third icon in the first control, the sixth input is for selecting a third icon from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control. The display unit is further configured to move the selected third icon to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the sixth input.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述显示单元,还用于在响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹。输入单元,还用于接收用户对新建文件夹图标的输入。显示单元,还用于响应于用户对新建文件夹图标的输入,在第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项。输入单元,还用于接收用户对文件夹名称输入项的输入。显示单元,还用于响应于用户对文件夹名称输入项的输入,在第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。In another possible design method, the display unit is further configured to respond to the first input of the first control by the user after displaying the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction. The new folder icon is displayed in the first control, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder. The input unit is also used to receive user input to the newly created folder icon. The display unit is further configured to display a folder name input item of the new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the new folder icon. The input unit is also used to receive user input to the folder name input. The display unit is further configured to display the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种GUI,该GUI存储在终端中,该终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,该一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。该GUI包括:响应于第一指令,在触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,第一控件用于管理终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,第一指令用于指示终端启动第一控件;响应于对第一控件的第一输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示触摸屏中的至少一个文件夹图标;响应于对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,第二输入用于选择第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式,在触摸屏上显示被选择的第一文件夹图标;响应于对第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入,在触摸屏上将第一图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a GUI, where the GUI is stored in a terminal, where the terminal includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors, where the one or more processors are configured to execute one or Multiple computer programs. The GUI includes: displaying, in response to the first instruction, a first page including a first control on the touch screen, the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in the display page of the terminal, and the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start a first control; in response to the first input to the first control, displaying at least one of the touch screens in the first control displayed on the touch screen; in response to the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon a second input for selecting a first folder icon, displaying the selected first folder icon on the touch screen in a first preset manner; in response to the third icon in the first page Input, move the first icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen.
在一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在响应于对第一控件的第一输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示触摸屏中的至少一个文件夹图标之后,响应于对至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,在触摸屏上显示第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标,第四输入与第二输入不同。In a possible design method, the GUI further includes: after displaying the at least one folder icon in the touch screen in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control, in response to the pair The fourth input of the second folder icon in one of the folder icons displays the application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon on the touch screen, and the fourth input is different from the second input.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在响应于第一指令,在触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面之后,响应于对第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,在触摸屏上将第二图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,第二图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;在响应于对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,在触摸屏上采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标之后,响应于对第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,第六输入用于从第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择第三图标,在触摸屏上将被选择的第三图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: responding to the fifth icon of the second icon in the first page after displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen in response to the first instruction Inputting, moving the second icon from the first page to the first control on the touch screen, the second icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page; in response to the first of the at least one folder icon a second input of the folder icon, after displaying the selected first folder icon in the first preset manner on the touch screen, in response to the sixth input to the third icon in the first control, the sixth input is used to The third icon is selected from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control, and the selected third icon is moved to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen.
在另一种可能的设计方法中,上述GUI还包括:在响应于第一指令,在触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面之后,响应于对第一控件的第一输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;响应于对新建文件夹图标的输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;响应于用户对文件夹名称输入项的输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示 命名后的新的文件夹图标。In another possible design method, the GUI further includes: after displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen, in response to the first instruction, responding to the first input to the first control on the touch screen The new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the input of the newly created folder icon, the folder of the new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen. Name input item; displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the user inputting the folder name input item Name the new folder icon.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种终端,该终端包括:处理器、存储器和触摸屏;所述处理器、所述存储器与所述触摸屏耦合在一起,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码和第一控件的相关数据,所述计算机程序代码包括指令,当所述处理器执行所述指令时,所述终端执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其可能的实现方式所述的移动应用图标的方法,所述触摸屏,用于显示所述处理器生成的图像,并接收用户的触控输入。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal, where the terminal includes: a processor, a memory, and a touch screen; the processor, the memory is coupled to the touch screen, and the memory is used to store computer program code and Data relating to a first control, the computer program code comprising instructions, when the processor executes the instructions, the terminal performs as described in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and possible implementations thereof The method of moving an application icon, the touch screen, for displaying an image generated by the processor, and receiving a touch input of a user.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当该计算机指令在终端上运行时,使得该终端执行如本申请第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其任一种可能的实现方式所述的移动应用图标的方法。In a ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including a computer instruction, when the computer instruction is run on a terminal, causing the terminal to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third And a method of mobile application icons as described in any of the possible implementations.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如本申请第一方面、第二方面、第三方面及其任一种可能的实现方式所述的移动应用图标的方法。In a tenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and any one of the A method of moving an application icon as described.
可以理解地,上述提供的第四方面、第六方面和第八方面所述的终端、第五方面和第七方面所述的GUI,第九方面所述的计算机存储介质,以及第十方面所述的计算机程序产品均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The terminal of the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, and the eighth aspect, the GUI of the fifth aspect and the seventh aspect, the computer storage medium of the ninth aspect, and the tenth aspect The computer program products are all used to perform the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be referred to the beneficial effects in the corresponding methods provided above, and are not described herein again.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图一;1 is a schematic diagram 1 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二;2 is a second schematic diagram of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图一;FIG. 4 is a flowchart 1 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图三;FIG. 5 is a third schematic diagram of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图四;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram 4 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图五;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram 5 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图六;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram 6 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图七;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram 7 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图八;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram 8 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图九;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram 9 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram 10 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十一;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram 11 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十二;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram 12 of an interface example of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图二;FIG. 15 is a second flowchart of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十三;16 is a schematic diagram 13 of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图三;FIG. 17 is a flowchart 3 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十四;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十五;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十六;20 is a schematic diagram 16 of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图四; FIG. 21 is a flowchart 4 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十七;FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图五;FIG. 23 is a flowchart 5 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十八;FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图25A为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图六;25A is a flowchart 6 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图25B为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图十九;25B is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图26为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图七;FIG. 26 is a flowchart 7 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图27为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的显示界面实例示意图二十;FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图28为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图八;28 is a flowchart 8 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图29为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十一;FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图30为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图九;FIG. 30 is a flowchart 9 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图31为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十二;FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图32为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十三;32 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图33为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图十;FIG. 33 is a flowchart 10 of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图34为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十四;FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图35为本申请实施例提供的一种移动应用图标的方法流程图十一;FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a method for moving an application icon according to an embodiment of the present application;
图36A为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十五;36A is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图36B为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十六;36B is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图37为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十七;37 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图38为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的界面实例示意图二十八;FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interface of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图39为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构组成示意图一;39 is a schematic structural diagram 1 of a terminal structure according to an embodiment of the present application;
图40为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构组成示意图二。FIG. 40 is a second schematic structural diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。In the following, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and are not to be construed as indicating or implying a relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Thus, features defining "first" and "second" may include one or more of the features either explicitly or implicitly. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, "multiple" means two or more unless otherwise stated.
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法及终端,该方法可以应用于移动或者管理该终端的显示页面上的应用图标(即应用程序的图标)和文件夹图标,该文件夹图标对应的文件夹中可以包括至少两个应用图标。The embodiment of the present application provides a method and a terminal for moving an application icon, and the method can be applied to move or manage an application icon (ie, an icon of an application) and a folder icon on a display page of the terminal, where the folder icon corresponds to At least two application icons can be included in the folder.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的终端可以为可以安装应用程序并显示应用程序图标的手机(如图1所示的手机100)、平板电脑、个人计算机(Personal Computer,PC)、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、智能手表、上网本、可穿戴电子设备等,本申请实施例对该设备的具体形式不做特殊限制。For example, the terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (such as the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1), a tablet computer, a personal computer (PC), and a personal digital assistant that can install an application and display an application icon. (personal digital assistant, PDA), smart watch, netbook, wearable electronic device, etc., the specific form of the device is not particularly limited.
其中,本申请实施例中的终端可以包括一个或者多个应用程序,并在终端的显示页面上显示该终端中的应用程序的图标。其中,本申请实施例中的应用程序可以分为嵌入式应用程序(即终端的系统应用)和可下载应用程序。其中,嵌入式应用程序是作为终端(如手机100)实现的一部分提供的应用程序。可下载应用程序是一个可以提供自己的因特网协议多媒体子系统(Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem,IMS)连接的应用程序,该可下载应用程序可以预先安装在终端中的应用或可以由用户下载 并安装在终端中的第三方应用。The terminal in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more applications, and display an icon of the application in the terminal on a display page of the terminal. The application program in the embodiment of the present application can be divided into an embedded application (ie, a system application of the terminal) and a downloadable application. Among them, the embedded application is an application provided as part of the implementation of the terminal (such as the mobile phone 100). The downloadable application is an application that can provide its own Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) connection. The downloadable application can be pre-installed in the terminal or can be downloaded by the user. And install third-party applications in the terminal.
其中,终端包括主屏幕(home screen),所述主屏幕可以包括一个或多个显示页面。该一个或多个显示页面可以用于显示手机中的应用图标以及文件夹图标。Wherein, the terminal includes a home screen, and the home screen may include one or more display pages. The one or more display pages can be used to display application icons and folder icons in the phone.
示例性的,假设本申请实施例中的终端为图1所示的手机100。如图1所示,该手机100可以包括三个显示页面,即图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101、图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102和图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103。手机100的home screen可以包括这三个显示页面。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the terminal in the embodiment of the present application is the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the mobile phone 100 can include three display pages, that is, the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1, the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, and the display page 102 in FIG. c) Display page 103 as shown. The home screen of the mobile phone 100 can include these three display pages.
假设手机100中安装有“计算器”应用、“地图”应用、“WiFi万能钥匙”应用、“电子邮件”应用、“手机淘宝”应用等应用程序。相应的,手机100的显示页面中则可以显示该手机100中的应用程序对应的应用图标。It is assumed that the mobile phone 100 has applications such as a "calculator" application, a "map" application, a "WiFi universal key" application, an "email" application, a "mobile phone Taobao" application, and the like. Correspondingly, the application icon corresponding to the application in the mobile phone 100 can be displayed in the display page of the mobile phone 100.
例如,如图1中的(a)所示,手机100的显示页面101上显示有以下应用图标:“计算器”应用图标、“地图”应用图标和“WiFi万能钥匙”应用图标。如图1中的(b)所示,手机100的显示页面102上显示有以下应用图标:“电子邮件”应用图标、“实用工具”文件夹图标、“设置”应用图标、“财务”文件夹图标104和“股票”应用图标105等。如图1中的(c)所示,手机100的显示页面103上显示有以下应用图标:“QQ”应用图标、“共享单车”应用图标和“天气”应用图标。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 1, the following application icons are displayed on the display page 101 of the mobile phone 100: a "calculator" application icon, a "map" application icon, and a "WiFi Master Key" application icon. As shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the following application icons are displayed on the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100: "email" application icon, "utility" folder icon, "setup" application icon, "finance" folder Icon 104 and "Stock" application icon 105 and the like. As shown in (c) of FIG. 1, the following application icons are displayed on the display page 103 of the mobile phone 100: a "QQ" application icon, a "shared bicycle" application icon, and a "weather" application icon.
举例来说,手机100中的“设置”应用、“照片”应用和“相机”应用等可以称为该手机100的嵌入式应用程序(即系统应用),“股票”应用、“QQ”应用、“共享单车”应用、“微信”应用等可以称为该手机100的可下载应用程序。For example, the "Settings" application, the "Photo" application, and the "Camera" application in the mobile phone 100 may be referred to as an embedded application (ie, a system application) of the mobile phone 100, a "stock" application, a "QQ" application, The "shared bicycle" application, the "WeChat" application, and the like may be referred to as a downloadable application of the mobile phone 100.
其中,本申请实施例中所述的文件夹图标对应的文件夹中可以包括一个或多个应用图标。例如,以图1中的(b)所示的“财务”文件夹为例,当用户点击图1中的(b)所示的“财务”文件夹图标104后,文件夹图标104被展开,如图2所示,“财务”文件夹图标104的展开窗口201中包括“财务”文件夹中所包括的“工商银行”应用和“中国银行”应用的应用图标。The folder corresponding to the folder icon described in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more application icons. For example, taking the "finance" folder shown in (b) of FIG. 1 as an example, when the user clicks on the "finance" folder icon 104 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the folder icon 104 is expanded. As shown in FIG. 2, the expanded window 201 of the "Finance" folder icon 104 includes the "ICBC" application included in the "Finance" folder and the application icon of the "Bank of China" application.
请参考图3,本申请实施例这里以终端为图1所示的手机100为例,对本申请实施例提供的终端进行介绍。其中,图3所示的手机100仅仅是终端的一个范例,并且手机100可以具有比图中所示出的更过的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或更多的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图3中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。Referring to FIG. 3, the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 as an example. Wherein, the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 3 is only an example of the terminal, and the mobile phone 100 may have more or less components than those shown in the figure, may combine two or more components, or may have Different component configurations. The various components shown in FIG. 3 may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
如图3所示,手机100包括:RF(Radio Frequency,射频)电路310、存储器320、输入单元330、显示器340、传感器350、音频电路360、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)模块370、处理器380、以及电源390等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图3中示出的手机结构并不构成对手机的限定,可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。As shown in FIG. 3, the mobile phone 100 includes an RF (Radio Frequency) circuit 310, a memory 320, an input unit 330, a display 340, a sensor 350, an audio circuit 360, a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) module 370, and processing. Device 380, and power supply 390 and other components. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the structure of the handset shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation to the handset, and may include more or less components than those illustrated, or some components may be combined, or different component arrangements.
下面结合图3对手机100的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍:The components of the mobile phone 100 will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 3:
RF电路310可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,可以将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器380处理;另外,将涉及上行的数据发送给基站。通常,RF电路包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等器件。此外,RF电路310还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他移动设备通信。所述 无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于全球移动通讯系统、通用分组无线服务、码分多址、宽带码分多址、长期演进、电子邮件、短消息服务等。The RF circuit 310 can be used for transmitting and receiving information or during a call, and receiving and transmitting signals. The downlink information of the base station can be received and processed by the processor 380. In addition, the data related to the uplink is sent to the base station. Typically, RF circuitry includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, RF circuitry 310 can also communicate with the network and other mobile devices via wireless communication. Said Wireless communication may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to global mobile communication systems, general packet radio services, code division multiple access, wideband code division multiple access, long term evolution, email, short message service, and the like.
存储器320可用于存储软件程序及数据。处理器380通过运行存储在存储器320的软件程序及数据,从而执行手机100的各种功能以及数据处理。存储器320可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据手机100的使用所创建的数据等。其中,存储器320中按照不同的功能可以划分出不同的存储区域用于存储各个应用程序及其使用所创建的数据。本申请实施例中的终端的存储器320中可以保存第一控件的相关信息,例如第一控件的图形用户界面(Graphical User Interface,GUI)。 Memory 320 can be used to store software programs and data. The processor 380 performs various functions and data processing of the mobile phone 100 by running software programs and data stored in the memory 320. The memory 320 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area, wherein the storage program area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.), and the like; the storage data area may be stored according to Data created by the use of the mobile phone 100, and the like. The memory 320 can be divided into different storage areas for storing data created by each application and its use according to different functions. The related information of the first control, such as a graphical user interface (GUI) of the first control, may be saved in the memory 320 of the terminal in the embodiment of the present application.
此外,存储器320可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。在以下实施例中,存储器320存储有使得手机100能运行的操作系统,例如苹果公司所开发的
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000001
操作系统,谷歌公司所开发的
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000002
开源操作系统,微软公司所开发的
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000003
操作系统等。
Moreover, memory 320 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device. In the following embodiments, the memory 320 stores an operating system that enables the mobile phone 100 to operate, such as that developed by Apple.
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000001
Operating system, developed by Google Inc.
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000002
Open source operating system, developed by Microsoft Corporation
Figure PCTCN2017100955-appb-000003
Operating system, etc.
输入单元330(如触摸屏)可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与手机100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的信号输入。具体地,输入单元330可以包括设置在手机100正面的触控面板331,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板331上或在触控面板331附近的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。可选的,触控面板331可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分(图3中未示出)。其中,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给处理器380,并能接收处理器380发来的指令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板331。An input unit 330, such as a touch screen, can be used to receive input numeric or character information, as well as to generate signal inputs related to user settings and function controls of the handset 100. Specifically, the input unit 330 may include a touch panel 331 disposed on the front surface of the mobile phone 100, and may collect a touch operation on or near the user (such as a user using a finger, a stylus, or the like, any suitable object or accessory on the touch panel 331 The operation is performed on or near the touch panel 331, and the corresponding connection device is driven according to a preset program. Alternatively, the touch panel 331 may include two parts (not shown in FIG. 3) of the touch detection device and the touch controller. Wherein, the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, and detects a signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts the touch information into contact coordinates, and sends the touch information. The processor 380 is provided and can receive instructions from the processor 380 and execute them. In addition, the touch panel 331 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves.
显示器340(即显示屏)可用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息以及手机100的各种菜单的图形用户界面(Graphical User Inter face,GUI)。显示器340可包括设置在手机100正面的显示面板341。其中,显示面板341可以采用液晶显示器、发光二极管等形式来配置。The display 340 (i.e., display screen) can be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user and a graphical user interface (GUI) of various menus of the mobile phone 100. Display 340 can include a display panel 341 disposed on the front of handset 100. The display panel 341 can be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, a light emitting diode, or the like.
在一些实施例中,手机100包括正面和背面。在正面的底部设置有光学触摸按键;还设置有触控面板331和显示面板341,触控面板331覆盖在显示面板341之上。当触控面板331检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器380以确定触摸事件,随后处理器380根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板341上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图3中,触控面板331与显示面板341是作为两个独立的部件来实现手机100的输入和输入功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触控面板331与显示面板341集成而实现手机100的输入和输出功能,集成后的触控面板331与显示面板341可以简称为触摸显示屏。In some embodiments, the handset 100 includes a front side and a back side. An optical touch button is disposed at the bottom of the front surface; a touch panel 331 and a display panel 341 are further disposed, and the touch panel 331 is overlaid on the display panel 341. When the touch panel 331 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 380 to determine a touch event, and then the processor 380 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 341 according to the type of the touch event. Although in FIG. 3, the touch panel 331 and the display panel 341 are used as two independent components to implement the input and input functions of the mobile phone 100, in some embodiments, the touch panel 331 may be integrated with the display panel 341. To realize the input and output functions of the mobile phone 100, the integrated touch panel 331 and the display panel 341 may be simply referred to as a touch display screen.
在另外的一些实施例中,上述触控面板331还可以设置有压力感应传感器,这样用户在上述触控面板上进行触摸操作时,触控面板还能检测到该触摸操作的压力,进 而手机100能够更准确地检测该触摸操作。In other embodiments, the touch panel 331 can also be provided with a pressure sensing sensor, so that when the user performs a touch operation on the touch panel, the touch panel can also detect the pressure of the touch operation. The mobile phone 100 can detect the touch operation more accurately.
手机100还可以包括至少一种传感器350,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地,光传感器可包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,其中,如图1A所示,环境光传感器351可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板341的亮度,接近光传感器352设置在手机100的正面,当在手机100移动到耳边时,根据接近光传感器352的检测,手机100关闭显示面板341的电源,这样手机100可以进一步节省电量。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等;至于手机100还可配置的陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不再赘述。手机100正面的顶部可以设置有前置摄像头353、背面的顶部设置有后置摄像头354。The handset 100 can also include at least one type of sensor 350, such as a light sensor, motion sensor, and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein, as shown in FIG. 1A, the ambient light sensor 351 may adjust the brightness of the display panel 341 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity light sensor 352 is disposed on the front of the mobile phone 100. When the mobile phone 100 is moved to the ear, the mobile phone 100 turns off the power of the display panel 341 according to the detection of the proximity light sensor 352, so that the mobile phone 100 can further save power. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes). When it is stationary, it can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity. It can be used to identify the gesture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Game, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc. As for the mobile phone 100 can also be configured with gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors and other sensors, here Let me repeat. The front of the front of the mobile phone 100 may be provided with a front camera 353, and the top of the back is provided with a rear camera 354.
音频电路360、扬声器361,麦克风362可提供用户与手机100之间的音频接口。音频电路360可将接收到的音频数据转换后的电信号,传输到扬声器361,由扬声器361转换为声音信号输出;另一方面,麦克风362将收集的声音信号转换为电信号,由音频电路360接收后转换为音频数据,再将音频数据输出至RF电路310以发送给比如另一手机,或者将音频数据输出至存储器320以便进一步处理。The audio circuit 360, the speaker 361, and the microphone 362 can provide an audio interface between the user and the handset 100. The audio circuit 360 can transmit the converted electrical data of the received audio data to the speaker 361 for conversion to the sound signal output by the speaker 361; on the other hand, the microphone 362 converts the collected sound signal into an electrical signal, by the audio circuit 360. After receiving, it is converted into audio data, and the audio data is output to the RF circuit 310 for transmission to, for example, another mobile phone, or the audio data is output to the memory 320 for further processing.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术,手机100可以通过WiFi模块370帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology, and the mobile phone 100 can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 370, which provides wireless broadband Internet access for users.
处理器380是手机100的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个手机的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器320内的软件程序,以及调用存储在存储器320内的数据,执行手机100的各种功能和处理数据,从而对手机进行整体监控。在一些实施例中,处理器380可包括一个或多个处理单元;处理器380还可以集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器380中。The processor 380 is a control center of the mobile phone 100, and connects various parts of the entire mobile phone by using various interfaces and lines, and executes the mobile phone 100 by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 320 and calling data stored in the memory 320. A variety of functions and processing data to monitor the phone as a whole. In some embodiments, processor 380 can include one or more processing units; processor 380 can also integrate an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor primarily processes operating systems, user interfaces, applications, and the like The modem processor primarily handles wireless communications. It will be appreciated that the above described modem processor may also not be integrated into the processor 380.
蓝牙模块381,用于通过蓝牙这种短距离通讯协议来与其他设备进行信息交互。例如,手机100可以通过蓝牙模块381与同样具备蓝牙模块的可穿戴电子设备(例如智能手表)建立蓝牙连接,从而进行数据交互。The Bluetooth module 381 is configured to perform information interaction with other devices through a short-range communication protocol such as Bluetooth. For example, the mobile phone 100 can establish a Bluetooth connection through the Bluetooth module 381 and a wearable electronic device (such as a smart watch) that also has a Bluetooth module, thereby performing data interaction.
手机100还包括给各个部件供电的电源390(比如电池)。电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器380逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗等功能。可以理解的是,在以下实施例中,电源390可以用于给显示面板341及触控面板331供电。The handset 100 also includes a power source 390 (such as a battery) that powers the various components. The power supply can be logically coupled to the processor 380 through a power management system to manage functions such as charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. It can be understood that, in the following embodiments, the power source 390 can be used to supply power to the display panel 341 and the touch panel 331.
以下实施例中的方法均可以在具有上述硬件结构的手机100中实现。The methods in the following embodiments can all be implemented in the mobile phone 100 having the above hardware structure.
本申请实施例提供的终端中可以安装第一控件,该终端可以通过该第一控件移动或者管理该终端的显示页面上的应用图标(即应用程序的图标)和文件夹图标。其中,该第一控件中可以添加该终端中的应用图标和/或文件夹图标(统称为第一图标),然后终端可以移动该第一控件中添加的第一图标至该终端的显示页面的空闲位置,或者将该第一控件中添加的多个应用图标添加至一个文件夹图标(即实现该终端的显示页 面上的应用图标的管理)。The first control may be installed in the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the terminal may move or manage an application icon (ie, an icon of an application) and a folder icon on a display page of the terminal through the first control. The application icon and/or the folder icon (collectively referred to as the first icon) in the terminal may be added to the first control, and then the terminal may move the first icon added in the first control to the display page of the terminal. An idle location, or adding a plurality of application icons added in the first control to a folder icon (ie, implementing a display page of the terminal) Management of application icons on the surface).
举例来说,本申请实施例中终端的显示页面的空闲位置是指:该终端的显示页面中可以用于显示/存放图标、但当前并未存放图标的位置。例如,如图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101中包括多个“空闲位置”,“空闲位置”107为其中之一,如图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103中也包括多个“空闲位置”,“空闲位置”106为其中之一。一般而言,手机的显示页面不会将空闲位置标识出来,即手机100中不显示如图1(a)和(c)中“空闲位置”的虚线框。For example, the idle location of the display page of the terminal in the embodiment of the present application refers to a location in the display page of the terminal that can be used to display/store the icon but does not currently store the icon. For example, the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1 includes a plurality of "idle positions", and the "idle position" 107 is one of them, as shown in (c) of FIG. Also included are a plurality of "idle locations", one of which is "idle location" 106. In general, the display page of the mobile phone does not identify the idle location, that is, the dotted line frame of the "idle location" in FIG. 1 (a) and (c) is not displayed in the mobile phone 100.
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,如图4所示,该移动应用图标的方法包括S401-S403:The embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon. As shown in FIG. 4, the method for moving an application icon includes S401-S403:
S401、终端响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理该终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示该终端启动该第一控件。S401. The terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate the terminal. Start the first control.
其中,本申请实施例中的第一页面可以是终端当前所显示的显示页面。例如,当手机100当前显示图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102时,上述第一页面则为图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102。当用户手指在图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102由左向右滑动后,手机100则可以显示图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101;此时,上述第一页面则为图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101。当用户手指在图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102由右向左滑动后,手机100则可以显示图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103;此时,上述第一页面则为图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103。The first page in the embodiment of the present application may be a display page currently displayed by the terminal. For example, when the mobile phone 100 currently displays the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. When the user's finger slides from left to right in the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1; Then, it is the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. When the user's finger slides from right to left in the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1; Then, it is the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG.
其中,上述第一指令可以为终端在上述第一页面检测到用户输入的预设手势后,生成的指令。例如,假设手机100当前显示图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103(即第一页面),当用户在显示页面103(即第一页面)输入预设手势(如用户手指接触显示页面103,并在显示页面103上由上向下滑动)后,手机100可以在该显示页面103上显示图5中的(c)所示的第一控件503。The first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after detecting a preset gesture input by the user on the first page. For example, suppose the mobile phone 100 currently displays the display page 103 (ie, the first page) shown in (c) of FIG. 1, when the user inputs a preset gesture on the display page 103 (ie, the first page) (eg, the user's finger touches the display page). 103, and after sliding up and down on the display page 103, the mobile phone 100 can display the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG. 5 on the display page 103.
或者,该第一指令可以是终端检测到该终端中的预设快捷键被按压后,生成的指令。例如,以第一页面为图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103为例,当用户同时按压手机100的两个音量键时,手机100可以在该显示页面103上显示图5中的(c)所示的第一控件503。Alternatively, the first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after detecting that the preset shortcut key in the terminal is pressed. For example, taking the first page as the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1 , when the user simultaneously presses the two volume keys of the mobile phone 100 , the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 103 on the display page 103 . (c) The first control 503 shown.
或者,终端的显示页面顶部的下拉菜单中可以包括“应用移动控件开关”,该第一指令可以是终端检测到用户点击该“应用移动控件开关”后,生成的指令。例如,以第一页面为图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103为例,如图5中的(a)所示,当用户手指沿着手机100的触摸屏的顶部向下滑动(即手指沿着图5中的(a)所示的滑动轨迹500滑动)时,手机100可以显示如图5中的(b)所示的下拉菜单501。该下拉菜单501中可以包括“无线局域网(Wireless,WLAN)”开关、“蓝牙”开关、“移动网络”开关和“应用图标管理”开关502。其中,该“应用图标管理”开关502用于启动上述第一控件。例如,当用户手指点击图5中的(b)所示的“应用图标管理”开关502后,手机100可以显示图5中的(c)所示的第一控件503。Alternatively, the drop-down menu at the top of the display page of the terminal may include an “Apply Mobile Control Switch”, and the first instruction may be an instruction generated by the terminal after the user clicks the “Apply Mobile Control Switch”. For example, taking the first page as the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. 1 as shown in (a) of FIG. 5, when the user's finger slides down the top of the touch screen of the mobile phone 100 (ie, When the finger slides along the sliding track 500 shown in (a) of FIG. 5, the mobile phone 100 can display the pull-down menu 501 as shown in (b) of FIG. The drop down menu 501 can include a "Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)" switch, a "Bluetooth" switch, a "Mobile Network" switch, and an "App Icon Management" switch 502. The "apply icon management" switch 502 is used to activate the first control. For example, when the user clicks the "apply icon management" switch 502 shown in (b) of FIG. 5, the mobile phone 100 can display the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG.
其中,如图5中的(c)所示,第一控件503中可以包括用于存放第一图标(应用 图标或者文件夹图标)的“控件存储区域”504、“落下”按钮505、“左移”按钮506和“右移”按钮507。其中,“落下”按钮505用于控制“控件存储区域”504中存放的第一图标移动至该终端的第一页面的空闲位置上;“左移”按钮506用于控制“控件存储区域”504中存放的第一图标移动至与该第一页面相邻的左侧显示页面的空闲位置上;“右移”按钮507用于控制“控件存储区域”504中存放的第一图标移动至与该第一页面相邻的右侧显示页面的空闲位置上。Wherein, as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, the first control 503 may include a first icon for storing (application) A "control storage area" 504, a "drop" button 505, a "left shift" button 506, and a "right shift" button 507 of an icon or folder icon). The "drop" button 505 is used to control the first icon stored in the "control storage area" 504 to move to the idle position of the first page of the terminal; the "left shift" button 506 is used to control the "control storage area" 504. The first icon stored in the file moves to the idle position of the left display page adjacent to the first page; the "right shift" button 507 is used to control the movement of the first icon stored in the "control storage area" 504 to The adjacent right side of the first page shows the free position of the page.
S402、终端响应于用户对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将该第一图标由上述第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为应用图标或者文件夹图标。S402. The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control, where the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon, in response to the user inputting the first icon of the first icon in the first page. .
在一种实施例中,当终端启动上述第一控件,并在第一页面显示该第一控件后,如果终端检测到用户对第一页面上的应用图标或者文件夹图标的点击操作(如单击或双击操作)、长按操作或重按操作,该终端则可以将该应用图标或者文件夹图标由上述第一页面移动至第一控件中显示。即上述第一输入可以是:当终端显示上述第一控件时,用户对第一页面上的应用图标或者文件夹图标的点击、长按或重按操作。In an embodiment, when the terminal starts the first control and displays the first control on the first page, if the terminal detects the user clicking on the application icon or the folder icon on the first page (such as a single The button or the double-click operation, the long-press operation or the re-press operation, the terminal may move the application icon or the folder icon from the first page to the first control. That is, the first input may be: when the terminal displays the first control, the user clicks, long presses or re-presses the application icon or the folder icon on the first page.
示例性的,假设第一页面为图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102,终端在执行S401之后,如图6中的(a)所示,该显示页面102中可以显示第一控件503。例如,当用户点击图6中的(a)所示的“设置”图标(即第一图标)601后,手机100可以将该“设置”图标601由上述第一页面102移动至第一控件503的中显示,如图6中的(b)所示,在第一控件503中的“控件存储区域”504中显示。此时,图6中的(b)所示的第一页面102中不包括“设置”图标601。Exemplarily, assuming that the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, after the terminal performs S401, as shown in (a) of FIG. 6, the first control may be displayed in the display page 102. 503. For example, when the user clicks the "Settings" icon (ie, the first icon) 601 shown in (a) of FIG. 6, the mobile phone 100 can move the "Settings" icon 601 from the first page 102 to the first control 503. The display in the middle is displayed in the "control storage area" 504 in the first control 503 as shown in (b) of FIG. At this time, the "set" icon 601 is not included in the first page 102 shown in (b) of FIG.
在另一种实施例中,上述第一输入可以是用户对第一页面上的第一图标的拖动操作,该拖动操作的滑动轨迹的起点为上述第一图标,该拖动操作的滑动轨迹的终点为上述第一控件。In another embodiment, the first input may be a user dragging operation on the first icon on the first page, and the starting point of the sliding track of the drag operation is the first icon, and the sliding of the drag operation The end point of the track is the first control described above.
示例性的,以图6中的(b)所示的显示页面为例,当用户沿图7中的(a)所示的滑动轨迹702,拖动“实用工具”图标(即文件夹图标)701至第一控件503(即第一控件503中的“控件存储区域”504)时,如图7中的(b)所示,手机100可以显示包括“实用工具”图标(即文件夹图标)701的第一控件503。图7中的(b)所示的第一页面102中不包括“实用工具”图标701。Exemplarily, taking the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 6 as an example, when the user moves along the sliding track 702 shown in (a) of FIG. 7, dragging the "utility" icon (ie, the folder icon). 701 to the first control 503 (ie, the "control storage area" 504 in the first control 503), as shown in (b) of FIG. 7, the mobile phone 100 can display a "utility" icon (ie, a folder icon). The first control 503 of 701. The "Utility" icon 701 is not included in the first page 102 shown in (b) of FIG.
可选的,在本申请实施例中,第一控件的面积小于终端的任一显示页面(包括第一页面、第二页面和第三页面)的面积。例如,如图6中的(a)所示的第一控件503的面积小于第一页面102的面积。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the area of the first control is smaller than the area of any display page of the terminal, including the first page, the second page, and the third page. For example, the area of the first control 503 as shown in (a) of FIG. 6 is smaller than the area of the first page 102.
可选的,在本申请实施例中,第一控件中的第一图标小于显示页面中的第一图标。例如,如图6中的(b)所示的第一控件503中的“设置”图标601小于图6中的(a)所示的第一页面102中的“设置”图标601。如图7中的(b)所示的第一控件503中的“实用工具”图标701小于图7中的(a)所示的第一页面102中的“实用工具”图标701。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first icon in the first control is smaller than the first icon in the display page. For example, the "Settings" icon 601 in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 6 is smaller than the "Settings" icon 601 in the first page 102 shown in (a) of FIG. The "utility" icon 701 in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 7 is smaller than the "utility" icon 701 in the first page 102 shown in (a) of FIG.
可选的,本申请实施例中,上述第一图标在由第一页面移动至第一控件的过程中逐渐变小。即终端可以响应于上述第一输入,在将该第一图标由上述第一页面移动至第一控件的过程中,显示该第一图标由大变小的动态图像。例如,如图7中的(a)所示,“实用工具”图标701可以在沿着滑动轨迹702,由第一页面102移动至第一控件503的过程中逐渐变小,即图7中的(a)所示的第一页面102中的“实用工具”图标701 大于滑动轨迹702上的“实用工具”图标,而滑动轨迹702上的“实用工具”图标大于图7中的(b)所示的第一控件503中的“实用工具”图标701。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first icon is gradually smaller in the process of moving from the first page to the first control. That is, the terminal may display, in response to the first input, a dynamic image in which the first icon is changed from large to small in the process of moving the first icon from the first page to the first control. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 7, the "Utility" icon 701 may become smaller during the movement from the first page 102 to the first control 503 along the sliding trajectory 702, that is, in FIG. (a) The "Utility" icon 701 in the first page 102 shown The "Utilities" icon on the sliding track 702 is larger than the "Utilities" icon in the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG.
S403、终端响应于用户对上述第一控件的第二输入,将该第一控件中的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示。S403. The terminal displays, in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to an idle position of the second page of the terminal.
在本申请实施例的第一种应用场景中,上述第二页面与上述第一页面相同。例如,该第二页面和第一页面都是图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102。在第一种应用场景中,用户对上述第一控件的第二输入可以用于指示终端将第一控件中的第二图标移动至该终端的第一页面的空闲位置上显示。In the first application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the second page is the same as the first page. For example, the second page and the first page are the display pages 102 shown in (b) of FIG. In the first application scenario, the second input of the first control by the user may be used to instruct the terminal to display the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the first page of the terminal.
示例性的,以图7中的(b)所示的显示页面102为例,上述第二输入可以是用户对图8中的(a)所示的“落下”按钮505的点击操作。当用户点击图8中的(a)所示的“落下”按钮505后,手机100可以将第一控件503中的第二图标(“设置”图标601和”实用工具”图标701)随机移动至该手机100的第一页面102的空闲位置802和空闲位置803上显示。或者,手机100可以按照上述第一页面中的第一图标移动至第一控件503的顺序,以及第一页面102的空闲位置按照由左向右、由上向下的顺序,依次将上述第二图标移动至该手机100的第一页面102的空闲位置802和空闲位置803上显示。显示如图8中的(b)所示的显示页面。Exemplarily, taking the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 7 as an example, the second input may be a user's click operation on the "drop" button 505 shown in (a) of FIG. When the user clicks the "drop" button 505 shown in (a) of FIG. 8, the mobile phone 100 can randomly move the second icon ("set" icon 601 and "utility" icon 701) in the first control 503 to The idle location 802 and the idle location 803 of the first page 102 of the handset 100 are displayed. Alternatively, the mobile phone 100 may move to the first control 503 in the order of the first icon in the first page, and the idle position of the first page 102 in the order from left to right and from top to bottom. The icon moves to the idle location 802 and the idle location 803 of the first page 102 of the handset 100 for display. A display page as shown in (b) of FIG. 8 is displayed.
例如,“设置”图标601是第一个移动至第一控件503的第一图标,而”实用工具”图标701是第二个移动至第一控件503的第一图标;因此,手机100可以将“设置”图标601移动至该手机100的第一页面102的空闲位置802上显示,将”实用工具”图标701移动至空闲位置803上显示。For example, the "Settings" icon 601 is the first first icon moved to the first control 503, and the "Utilities" icon 701 is the second first icon moved to the first control 503; therefore, the mobile phone 100 can The "Settings" icon 601 is moved to the idle position 802 of the first page 102 of the handset 100, and the "Utilities" icon 701 is moved to the idle position 803 for display.
在本申请实施例的第二种应用场景中,上述第二页面与第一页面不同,即第二页面是终端中不同于第一页面的一个显示页面。例如,以终端为图1所示的手机100为例。当上述第一页面是图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102时,上述第二页面可以是图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101或者图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103。可选的,第二页面还可以是图1未示出的手机100的其他显示页面。In the second application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the second page is different from the first page, that is, the second page is a display page different from the first page in the terminal. For example, the mobile phone 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example. When the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the second page may be the display page 101 shown in (a) of FIG. 1 or (c) shown in FIG. Display page 103. Optionally, the second page may also be other display pages of the mobile phone 100 not shown in FIG. 1.
在第二种应用场景中,上述第二页面是在第一侧与该第一页面相邻的显示页面,该第一侧是左侧或者右侧。该第二输入可以用于指示终端将该第一控件中的第二图标移动至该第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In the second application scenario, the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is a left side or a right side. The second input can be used to instruct the terminal to move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page for display.
在第二种应用场景的第一种实现方式中,当第一侧是左侧时,假设第一页面是图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102,那么第二页面则可以是图1中的(a)所示的显示页面101。此时,上述第二输入可以是用于对图9中的(a)所示的“左移”按钮506的点击操作。手机100当前显示图9中的(b)所示的显示页面102(第一页面),当用户点击图9中的(b)所示的“左移”按钮506后,手机100则可以显示图9中的(c)所示的显示页面101(第二页面),该图9中的(c)所示的显示页面101(第二页面)中包括“设置”图标601和”实用工具”图标701,以及第一控件503。In the first implementation manner of the second application scenario, when the first side is the left side, and the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the second page may be a figure. The display page 101 shown in (a) of 1. At this time, the above second input may be a click operation for the "left shift" button 506 shown in (a) of FIG. The mobile phone 100 currently displays the display page 102 (first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 9. When the user clicks the "left shift" button 506 shown in (b) of FIG. 9, the mobile phone 100 can display the map. The display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of 9 includes the "set" icon 601 and the "utility" icon in the display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of FIG. 701, and the first control 503.
其中,相比于图9中的(b)所示的第一控件,图9中的(c)所示的第一控件中不包括“设置”图标601和”实用工具”图标701。当用户手指在图9中的(c)所示的显示页面中沿着“滑动轨迹”901由右向左滑动后,手机100可以显示图9中的(d)所示的显示页面。其中,相比于图9中的(a)所示的显示页面,图9中的(c)所示的显 示页面中包括“设置”图标601和”实用工具”图标701。图9中的(c)所示显示页面中还包括第一控件503。Here, the "set" icon 601 and the "utility" icon 701 are not included in the first control shown in (c) of FIG. 9 as compared with the first control shown in (b) of FIG. When the user's finger slides from right to left along the "sliding track" 901 in the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 9, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (d) of FIG. Wherein, compared to the display page shown in (a) of FIG. 9, the display shown in (c) of FIG. 9 The "Settings" icon 601 and the "Utility" icon 701 are included in the display page. The first control 503 is further included in the display page shown in (c) of FIG.
可选的,当用户点击图10中的(a)(即图9中的(b))所示的“左移”按钮506后,手机100可以不显示图9中的(c)所示的显示页面101(第二页面),而显示图10中的(b)所示的显示页面102(第一页面);当用户手指在图10中的(b)所示的显示页面中沿着“滑动轨迹”1001由左向右滑动后,手机100可以显示图10中的(c)所示的显示页面101(第二页面),即图9中的(c)所示的显示页面101(第二页面)。Alternatively, when the user clicks the "left shift" button 506 shown in (a) of FIG. 10 (ie, (b) in FIG. 9), the mobile phone 100 may not display the (c) shown in FIG. The page 101 (second page) is displayed, and the display page 102 (first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 10 is displayed; when the user's finger is along the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 10, After the sliding track "1001] is slid from left to right, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page 101 (second page) shown in (c) of FIG. 10, that is, the display page 101 shown in (c) of FIG. 9 (the Two pages).
在第二种应用场景的第二种实现方式中,当该第一侧是右侧时,假设第一页面是图1中的(b)所示的显示页面102,那么该第二页面则可以是图1中的(c)所示的显示页面103。此时,上述第二输入可以是用于对图10中的(a)所示的“右移”按钮的点击操作。其中,手机100响应于用户对图10中的(a)所示的“右移”按钮的点击操作,将第一控件503中的“设置”图标601和“实用工具”图标701,移动至显示页面103的空闲位置上显示的方法,可以参考手机100响应于用户对图10中的(a)所示的“左移”按钮的点击操作,将第一控件503中的“设置”图标601和”实用工具”图标701,移动至显示页面101的空闲位置上显示的方法,本申请这里不再赘述。In the second implementation manner of the second application scenario, when the first side is the right side, if the first page is the display page 102 shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the second page may be It is the display page 103 shown in (c) of FIG. At this time, the above second input may be a click operation for the "right shift" button shown in (a) of FIG. The mobile phone 100 moves the "set" icon 601 and the "utility" icon 701 in the first control 503 to the display in response to the user's click operation on the "right shift" button shown in (a) of FIG. The method of displaying the idle position of the page 103 can refer to the "setting" icon 601 in the first control 503 by referring to the click operation of the mobile phone 100 in response to the user's "left shift" button shown in (a) of FIG. The "Utility" icon 701 is moved to the display of the idle position of the display page 101, which is not described herein again.
可选的,图9中的(c)所示的显示页面、图9中的(d)所示的显示页面、图10中的(b)所示的显示页面,图10中的(c)所示的显示页面中均可以不包括第一控件503。即终端响应于上述第二输入,在将该第一控件中的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示后,可以关闭上述第一控件。Alternatively, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 9 , the display page shown in (d) of FIG. 9 , and the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 10 , (c) of FIG. 10 . The first control 503 may not be included in the displayed display page. That is, in response to the second input, the terminal may close the first control after moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal.
其中,本申请实施例中的第一控件悬浮显示在终端的显示页面(如第一页面)上,终端响应于用户对第一控件的移动手势,可以按照该移动手势的滑动轨迹在显示页面上移动显示上述第一控件,即显示该第一控件按照该滑动轨迹动态移动的图像。The first control in the embodiment of the present application is displayed on the display page of the terminal (such as the first page), and the terminal may respond to the movement gesture of the first control by the user, and may be displayed on the display page according to the sliding track of the mobile gesture. The first control is displayed by moving, that is, an image in which the first control dynamically moves according to the sliding track is displayed.
例如,如图11中的(a)所示,当用户手指沿滑动轨迹1101拖拽第一控件503后,手机100可以按照滑动轨迹1101移动该第一控件503,显示图11中的(b)所示的界面。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 11, after the user's finger drags the first control 503 along the sliding track 1101, the mobile phone 100 can move the first control 503 according to the sliding track 1101, and display (b) in FIG. The interface shown.
在本申请中,当第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,该第一控件的面积小于第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时该第一控件的面积。In the present application, when the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control, the area of the first control is smaller than the area of the first control when the application icon and/or the folder icon are included in the first control.
例如,如图12中的(a)所示,第一控件503中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标,而如图12中的(b)所示,第一控件503中包括“地图”图标1201,图12中的(b)所示的第一控件503的面积大于图12中的(a)所示的第一控件503的面积。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 12, the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control 503, and as shown in (b) of FIG. 12, the first control 503 includes a "map". The icon 1201, the area of the first control 503 shown in (b) of FIG. 12 is larger than the area of the first control 503 shown in (a) of FIG.
可选的,在终端响应于上述第一输入,向第一控件中添加第一图标的过程中,终端可以显示该第一控件的面积由小变大的动态图像。Optionally, in a process in which the terminal adds the first icon to the first control in response to the first input, the terminal may display a dynamic image in which the area of the first control is changed from small to large.
需要说明的是,上述图5中的(c),图6中的(a)和(b),图7中的(a)和(b),图8中的(a)和(b),图9中的(b)、(c)和(d),图10中的(a)、(b)和(c)仅给出第一控件503的一种实例,本申请实施例中的第一控件的包括但不限于上述附图中所示的第一控件。例如,如图13中的(a)或者图14中的(a)所示,第一控件1301中可以不包括上述“左移”按钮、“右移”按钮、“落下”按钮。It should be noted that (c) in the above FIG. 5, (a) and (b) in FIG. 6, (a) and (b) in FIG. 7, and (a) and (b) in FIG. (b), (c), and (d) in FIG. 9, (a), (b), and (c) in FIG. 10 only give an example of the first control 503, which is the first embodiment of the present application. A control includes, but is not limited to, the first control shown in the above figures. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 13 or (a) of FIG. 14, the "left shift" button, the "right shift" button, and the "drop" button may not be included in the first control 1301.
在这种情况下,上述第二输入可以为如图13中的(a)所示的用户在第一控件1301上沿滑动轨迹1302的滑动操作,手机100可以响应于该第二输入,将第一控件中的第 二图标移动至该终端的第一页面的空闲位置上显示。即显示图13中的(b)所示的显示页面103。或者,上述第二输入可以为图14中的(a)所示的用户在第一控件1301上沿滑动轨迹1402的滑动操作,手机100可以响应于该第二输入,将第一控件1301中的“天气”图标1402移动至与该第一页面相邻的左侧显示页面的空闲位置上显示。即显示图14中的(b)所示包括“天气”图标1402的显示页面102。或者,上述第二输入可以为用户在第一控件上由左向右的滑动操作,终端可以响应于该第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至与该第一页面相邻的右侧显示页面的空闲位置上显示。In this case, the second input may be a sliding operation of the user along the sliding track 1302 on the first control 1301 as shown in (a) of FIG. 13, and the mobile phone 100 may respond to the second input. The first in a control The second icon is displayed to move to the idle position of the first page of the terminal. That is, the display page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 13 is displayed. Alternatively, the second input may be a sliding operation of the user along the sliding track 1402 on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. 14, and the mobile phone 100 may respond to the second input to the first control 1301. The "Weather" icon 1402 is displayed to be displayed at an idle position of the left display page adjacent to the first page. That is, the display page 102 including the "weather" icon 1402 shown in (b) of FIG. 14 is displayed. Alternatively, the second input may be a left-to-right sliding operation of the user on the first control, and the terminal may move the second icon in the first control to be adjacent to the first page in response to the second input. The free display on the right side of the page is displayed.
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,终端可以响应于第一指令,启动第一控件,并在该终端的第一页面上显示用于管理该终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标的第一控件;然后响应于用户对该第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将该第一图标由所述第一页面移动至该第一控件中显示;随后,该终端便可以响应于用户对该第一控件的第二输入,将该第一控件中的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,通过本申请实施例提供的方案,终端可以通过第一控件实现该终端的显示页面上的多个图标(应用图标和/或文件夹图标)的同时移动,可以提高移动终端的显示页面上的应用图标的管理效率。The embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon, and the terminal may start the first control in response to the first instruction, and display an application icon and a file in the display page for managing the terminal on the first page of the terminal. a first control of the icon; and then, in response to the user's first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the first page to the first control; subsequently, the terminal The second icon in the first control is displayed to be displayed on the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the user's second input to the first control. In the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may implement simultaneous movement of multiple icons (application icons and/or folder icons) on the display page of the terminal by using the first control, and may improve the display page of the mobile terminal. The management efficiency of the application icons.
进一步的,本申请实施例中,终端不仅可以如上述实施例所述,响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将该第一控件中的所有第二图标都移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示;该终端还可以响应于用户对该第一控件中的部分第一图标的选择,将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。Further, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may not only move all the second icons in the first control to the idleness of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user, as described in the foregoing embodiment. Displayed in position; the terminal may also move the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page in response to the user's selection of a portion of the first icon in the first control.
具体的,在本申请实施例的第三种应用场景中,上述第二输入还可以用于选择第一控件中的第二图标,并指示终端将被选择的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示。例如,该第二输入可以为用户对第一控件中的一个第二图标的双击操作,或者该第二输入可以为用户对该第一控件中的一个第二图标的长按操作。在第三种应用场景中,该第二页面与第一页面相同。具体的,在第三种应用场景中,如图15所示,图4所示的S403可以替换为S1501:Specifically, in the third application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the second input may be further configured to select a second icon in the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the terminal. The two pages are displayed in the free position. For example, the second input may be a double-click operation of a second icon in the first control by the user, or the second input may be a long-press operation of the second icon in the first control by the user. In the third application scenario, the second page is the same as the first page. Specifically, in the third application scenario, as shown in FIG. 15, S403 shown in FIG. 4 may be replaced with S1501:
S1501、终端响应于用户对上述第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,第二页面与第一页面相同。S1501: The terminal moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the second icon in the first control by the user, where the second page is the same as the first page. .
示例性的,上述第二输入可以是用户对第一控件中的第二图标的双击操作、拖拽操作等。该拖拽操作的滑动轨迹的起点是第一控件中的第二图标,终点是第二页面。Exemplarily, the second input may be a double-click operation, a drag operation, or the like of the second icon in the first control by the user. The starting point of the sliding track of the drag operation is the second icon in the first control, and the ending point is the second page.
假设上述第二输入为用户对图16中的(a)所示的第一控件中的“实用工具”图标701的双击操作。当用户双击图16中的(a)所示的第一控件中的“实用工具”图标701后,手机100则可以显示图16中的(b)所示的显示页面,相比于图16中的(a)所示的显示页面,图16中的(b)所示的显示页面中包括“实用工具”图标701。但是,图16中的(b)所示的第一控件中不包括“实用工具”图标701。It is assumed that the above second input is a double-click operation of the "utility" icon 701 in the first control shown in (a) of FIG. 16 by the user. When the user double-clicks the "Utility" icon 701 in the first control shown in (a) of FIG. 16, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 16 as compared with FIG. The display page shown in (a) includes a "utility" icon 701 in the display page shown in (b) of FIG. However, the "utility" icon 701 is not included in the first control shown in (b) of FIG.
可选的,如图17所示,在图4所示的S403之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S1701,上述S403可以替换为S1702:Optionally, as shown in FIG. 17, before the S403 shown in FIG. 4, the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S1701, and the foregoing S403 may be replaced by S1702:
S1701、终端响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,该第三输入用于从第一控件中选择该第二图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标。S1701, the terminal is responsive to a third input of the second icon in the first control by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and the selected second icon is displayed in a first preset manner. .
其中,上述第三输入与S1501所述的第二输入不同。例如,该第三输入可以是用 户对第一控件中的第二图标的单击操作,而上述S1501所述的第二输入是用户对第一控件中的第二图标的双击操作,或者该第二输入是用户对该第一控件中的第二图标的长按操作。The third input is different from the second input described in S1501. For example, the third input can be used The user clicks on the second icon in the first control, and the second input described in the above S1501 is a double-click operation of the second icon in the first control by the user, or the second input is the first A long press of the second icon in the control.
举例来说,上述第一预设方式可以是为采用预定义颜色标记第二图标的方式,突出显示该第二图标的方式等,可以将第二图标与第一控件中的其他图标区别显示的方式,本申请实施例这里对第一预设方式的具体形式不再一一介绍。For example, the first preset manner may be a manner of marking a second icon by using a predefined color, a manner of highlighting the second icon, and the like, and the second icon may be displayed differently from other icons in the first control. The specific form of the first preset mode is not described here in this embodiment.
示例性的,如图18中的(a)所示,当用户手指点击第一控件中的“支付宝”图标1801(即第二图标)后,手机100可以采用图18中的(b)所示的第一预设方式显示被选择的“支付宝”图标1801。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 18, when the user clicks the "Alipay" icon 1801 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the (b) shown in FIG. The first preset mode displays the selected "Alipay" icon 1801.
S1702、终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。S1702. The terminal moves the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page in response to the second input of the first control by the user.
其中,S1702所述的第二输入可以用于指示终端将第一控件中的第二图标移动至该终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,该第二页面与上述第一页面可以相同,也可以不同。其中,S1702所述的第二输入的详细描述可以参考本申请实施例对S403中的第二输入的介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。The second input described in S1702 may be used to instruct the terminal to display the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, where the second page may be the same as the first page, Can be different. For a detailed description of the second input in S1702, reference may be made to the description of the second input in S403 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein again.
示例性的,当用户点击图18中的(b)所示的第一控件中的“落下”按钮505后,手机100可以将图18中的(b)所示的被选择的“支付宝”图标1801移动至该手机100的显示页面102的空闲位置上显示,即显示图18中的(c)所示的显示页面。图18中的(c)所示的显示页面中包括“支付宝”图标1801,而图18中的(c)所示第一控件中不包括“支付宝”图标1801。Illustratively, when the user clicks the "drop" button 505 in the first control shown in (b) of FIG. 18, the mobile phone 100 can select the selected "Alipay" icon shown in (b) of FIG. The 1801 is moved to the idle position of the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18 is displayed. The "Amber" icon 1801 is included in the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18, and the "Alipay" icon 1801 is not included in the first control shown in (c) of FIG.
可选的,当用户点击图18中的(b)所示被选择的“支付宝”图标1801后,即用户再次点击“支付宝”图标1801后,手机100也可以将图18中的(b)所示的被选择的“支付宝”图标1801移动至该手机100的显示页面102的空闲位置上显示,即显示图18中的(c)所示的显示页面。Optionally, after the user clicks on the selected "Alipay" icon 1801 shown in (b) of FIG. 18, that is, after the user clicks the "Alipay" icon 1801 again, the mobile phone 100 can also use the (b) in FIG. The selected "Alipay" icon 1801 is displayed to be displayed on the idle position of the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 18 is displayed.
示例性的,假设手机100执行S1701后,手机100可以采用图19中的(a)所示的第一预设方式显示被选择的“支付宝”图标1801和“淘宝”图标1901。当用户手指点击图19中的(a)所示的“右移”按钮507后,手机100可以将图19中的(a)所示的被选择的“支付宝”图标1801和“淘宝”图标1901,移动至该手机100的显示页面103的空闲位置上显示,即显示图19中的(b)所示的显示页面103。图19中的(b)所示的显示页面中包括“支付宝”图标1801和“淘宝”图标1901,而图18中的(c)所示第一控件中不包括“支付宝”图标1801和“淘宝”图标1901。Exemplarily, after the mobile phone 100 executes S1701, the mobile phone 100 may display the selected "Alipay" icon 1801 and the "Taobao" icon 1901 in the first preset manner shown in (a) of FIG. When the user clicks the "right shift" button 507 shown in (a) of FIG. 19, the mobile phone 100 can select the selected "Alipay" icon 1801 and the "Taobao" icon 1901 shown in (a) of FIG. The display is moved to the idle position of the display page 103 of the mobile phone 100, that is, the display page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 19 is displayed. The display page shown in (b) of FIG. 19 includes an "Alipay" icon 1801 and a "Taobao" icon 1901, and the first control shown in (c) of FIG. 18 does not include the "Alipay" icon 1801 and "Taobao". Icon 1901.
本申请实施例保护的技术方案中,终端可以响应于用户对该第一控件中的部分第一图标的选择,针对性的将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示,可以实现终端对应用图标的针对性管理,提高了终端管理应用图标的效率。In the technical solution protected by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may, in response to the user selecting the part of the first icon in the first control, move the second icon that is selected to be displayed to the idle position of the second page. The targeted management of the application icons by the terminal can be realized, and the efficiency of the terminal management application icons is improved.
进一步的,在上述第二种应用场景中,上述第二页面与第一页面不同,并且第二页面是在第一侧与该第一页面相邻的显示页面,该第一侧是左侧或者右侧。在这种应用场景中,可能会存在第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于上述第一控件中的第二图标的个数N的情况。在这种情况下,第二页面的空闲位置不足以显示第一控件中的所有第二图标。例如,假设如图20中的(a)所示的手机100的显示页面102中仅包括一 个空闲位置(即M=1),而图20中的(b)所示的手机100的显示页面103上所显示的第一控件中包括两个第二图标(即“天气”图标2001和“共享单车”图标2002);如此,当用户手指点击图20中的(b)所示的“左移”按钮506后,手机100的显示页面102不足以显示该“天气”图标2001和“共享单车”图标2002。针对这种情况,上述S403可以替换为S2101。例如,如图21所示,图4所示的S403可以替换为S2101:Further, in the second application scenario, the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, where the first side is the left side or Right. In such an application scenario, there may be a case where the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control. In this case, the free position of the second page is not sufficient to display all of the second icons in the first control. For example, assume that only one of the display pages 102 of the mobile phone 100 as shown in (a) of FIG. 20 is included. One idle position (ie, M=1), and the first control displayed on the display page 103 of the mobile phone 100 shown in (b) of FIG. 20 includes two second icons (ie, “weather” icon 2001 and “ The shared bicycle icon 2002); thus, when the user clicks the "left shift" button 506 shown in (b) of FIG. 20, the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 is insufficient to display the "weather" icon 2001 and the "shared bicycle" Icon 2002. For this case, the above S403 can be replaced with S2101. For example, as shown in FIG. 21, S403 shown in FIG. 4 can be replaced with S2101:
S2101、终端响应于用户对第一控件的第二输入,当第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,终端将第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并将第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至终端的第三页面的空闲位置上显示。S2101. The terminal responds to the second input of the first control by the user. When the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the terminal sets the M of the first control. The second icon is displayed on the M free positions of the second page, and the remaining NM second icons in the first control are displayed on the idle position of the third page of the terminal.
其中,上述第三页面是在上述第一侧与该第二页面相邻的显示页面。The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side.
示例性的,当用户手指点击图20中的(b)所示的“左移”按钮506后,手机100可以将“天气”图标2001,移动至该手机100的显示页面102(即第二页面)的空闲位置上显示,即显示图20中的(c)所示的显示页面102;并将“共享单车”图标2002,移动至该手机100的显示页面101(即第三页面)的空闲位置上显示。Illustratively, when the user clicks the "left shift" button 506 shown in (b) of FIG. 20, the mobile phone 100 can move the "weather" icon 2001 to the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 (ie, the second page). Displayed in the idle position, that is, the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20 is displayed; and the "shared bicycle" icon 2002 is moved to the idle position of the display page 101 (ie, the third page) of the mobile phone 100. Displayed on.
如图20中的(c)所示,当用户手指沿着手机100的显示页面102(即第二页面)中的滑动轨迹2003,由左向右滑动以切换手机100的显示页面时,手机100可以显示图20中的(d)所示的显示页面101,图20中的(d)所示的显示页面101中包括“共享单车”图标2002。As shown in (c) of FIG. 20, when the user's finger slides along the sliding track 2003 in the display page 102 (ie, the second page) of the mobile phone 100, and slides from left to right to switch the display page of the mobile phone 100, the mobile phone 100 The display page 101 shown in (d) of FIG. 20 can be displayed, and the "shared bicycle" icon 2002 is included in the display page 101 shown in (d) of FIG.
可选的,上述第三页面还可以是上述第一页面。即当用户手指点击图20中的(b)所示第一页面103中的“左移”按钮506后,手机100可以将“天气”图标2001,移动至该手机100的显示页面102(即第二页面)的空闲位置上显示,即显示图20中的(c)所示的显示页面102;并将“共享单车”图标2002,移动至该手机100的显示页面103(即第一页面)的空闲位置上显示。Optionally, the third page may also be the first page. That is, when the user clicks the "left shift" button 506 in the first page 103 shown in (b) of FIG. 20, the mobile phone 100 can move the "weather" icon 2001 to the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 (ie, Displayed in the idle position of the two pages), that is, the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20 is displayed; and the "shared bicycle" icon 2002 is moved to the display page 103 (ie, the first page) of the mobile phone 100. Displayed in the idle position.
进一步的,当终端响应于第一输入将第一页面中的第一图标移动至第一控件中显示之后,该终端还能会响应于用户对第一页面的第四输入,切换手机100的显示页面,以在切换后的显示页面(即第二页面)显示该第一控件。具体的,在S403或者S2101之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S2201:Further, after the terminal moves the first icon in the first page to the first control in response to the first input, the terminal may also switch the display of the mobile phone 100 in response to the fourth input of the first page by the user. The page displays the first control on the displayed page after switching (ie, the second page). Specifically, before the method of S403 or S2101, the method in this embodiment may further include S2201:
S2201、终端响应于用户对第一页面的第四输入,在第二页面上显示包括第一图标的第一控件,该第四输入用于切换该终端的显示页面。S2201: The terminal displays, in response to the fourth input of the first page by the user, a first control including a first icon, where the fourth input is used to switch the display page of the terminal.
其中,上述第四输入可以是用户在终端的显示页面上由左向右的滑动操作,或者用户在终端的显示页面上由右向左的滑动操作。The fourth input may be a left-to-right sliding operation of the user on the display page of the terminal, or a right-to-left sliding operation by the user on the display page of the terminal.
例如,如图22中的(b)所示,当用户手指沿着图22中的(b)所示的滑动轨迹2201由左向右滑动后,手机100可以显示图22中的(c)所示的显示页面,即手机100的当前显示页面由图22中的(b)所示的显示页面103(即第一页面)切换为图22中的(c)所示的显示页面102(即第二页面)。For example, as shown in (b) of FIG. 22, when the user's finger slides from left to right along the sliding track 2201 shown in (b) of FIG. 22, the mobile phone 100 can display (c) of FIG. The displayed display page, that is, the current display page of the mobile phone 100 is switched from the display page 103 (ie, the first page) shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 22 (ie, Two pages).
可以理解,当终端响应于用户的第二输入,将第二页面上显示的第一控件中的第二图标移动至该第二页面的空闲位置处显示时,可能会存在第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于上述第一控件中的第二图标的个数N的情况。在这种情况下,第二页面的空闲位置不足以显示第一控件中的所有第二图标。针对这种情况,在上述S2201之后, 上述S403可以替换为S2101。It can be understood that when the terminal moves the second icon in the first control displayed on the second page to the idle position of the second page in response to the second input of the user, the idle position of the second page may exist. The number M is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control. In this case, the free position of the second page is not sufficient to display all of the second icons in the first control. In response to this situation, after the above S2201, The above S403 can be replaced with S2101.
例如,假设如图22中的(a)所示的手机100的显示页面102中仅包括一个空闲位置(即M=1),而图22中的(c)所示的手机102的显示页面103上所显示的第一控件中包括两个第二图标(即“天气”图标2001和“共享单车”图标2002);如此,当用户手指点击图22中的(c)所示的“落下”按钮505后,手机100的显示页面102不足以显示该“天气”图标2001和“共享单车”图标2002。此时,手机100可以将“天气”图标2001,移动至该手机100的显示页面102(即第二页面)的空闲位置上显示,即显示图20中的(c)所示的显示页面102;并将“共享单车”图标2002,移动至该手机100的显示页面101(即第三页面)的空闲位置上显示。For example, assume that the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 shown in (a) of FIG. 22 includes only one idle position (ie, M=1), and the display page 103 of the mobile phone 102 shown in (c) of FIG. The first control displayed on the top includes two second icons (ie, "weather" icon 2001 and "shared bicycle" icon 2002); thus, when the user clicks the "drop" button shown in (c) of FIG. 22 After 505, the display page 102 of the mobile phone 100 is insufficient to display the "weather" icon 2001 and the "shared bicycle" icon 2002. At this time, the mobile phone 100 can display the "weather" icon 2001, to the idle position of the display page 102 (ie, the second page) of the mobile phone 100, that is, display the display page 102 shown in (c) of FIG. 20; The "shared bicycle" icon 2002 is moved to the idle position of the display page 101 (ie, the third page) of the mobile phone 100.
本申请实施例提供的移动应用图标的方法,终端可以在第二图标的目标显示页面(即第二页面)不足以显示所有的第二图标时,将部分第二图标显示在第二页面,将剩余的第二图标显示在第一侧与第二页面相邻的第三页面,或者将剩余的第二图标显示在第一页面。In the method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may display a part of the second icon on the second page when the target display page of the second icon (ie, the second page) is insufficient to display all the second icons, The remaining second icon displays a third page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or displays the remaining second icon on the first page.
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,如图23所示,该移动应用图标的方法包括S2301-S2303:The embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon. As shown in FIG. 23, the method for moving an application icon includes S2301-S2303:
S2301、终端响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示终端启动所述第一控件。S2301: The terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control on the first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start The first control.
其中,本申请实施例中S2301的详细描述可以参考上述实施例中对S401的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。For a detailed description of the S2301 in the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the detailed description of the S401 in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
S2302、终端响应于用户对第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为应用图标或者文件夹图标。S2302: The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control in response to the first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, where the first icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
其中,本申请实施例中S2302的详细描述可以参考上述实施例中对S402的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。For a detailed description of the S2302 in the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the detailed description of the S402 in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
S2303、终端响应于用户对第一页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示。S2303. The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the first display position for display according to the second input of the user to the first display position on the first page.
其中,该第二图标是第一控件中的一个应用图标或者文件夹图标;该第一显示位置是空闲位置,或者第一显示位置上显示有第三图标;该第三图标是应用图标或者文件夹图标;该第二图标是第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。The second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control; the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position; the third icon is an application icon or a file a folder icon; the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
在本申请实施例的一种应用场景中,上述第一显示位置是空闲位置。在这种应用场景中,终端可以响应于用户对第一页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,直接将第一控件中的第二图标移动至该第一显示位置上显示。In an application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the first display location is an idle location. In such an application scenario, the terminal may directly move the second icon in the first control to the first display position in response to the second input of the first display position on the first page by the user.
在这种应用场景的实现方式(a)中,上述第二图标可以是上述第一控件中、第一个被移动至该第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。In the implementation manner (a) of the application scenario, the second icon may be an application icon or a folder icon that is moved to the first control in the first control.
示例性的,如图24中的(a)所示,假设手机100的显示页面103(第一页面)中包括空闲位置2401(即第一显示位置)。当用户手指点击该空闲位置2401后,手机100可以将第一控件中的“天气”图标2001(即第一控件中、第一个被移动至该第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标)移动至该空闲位置2401上显示,即显示图24中的(b)所示的显示页面。 Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 24, it is assumed that the idle page 2401 (ie, the first display position) is included in the display page 103 (first page) of the mobile phone 100. After the user clicks on the idle location 2401, the mobile phone 100 may display the "weather" icon 2001 in the first control (ie, the first control, the first one is moved to the application icon or the folder icon in the first control) Moving to the idle position 2401 is displayed, that is, the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 24 is displayed.
在这种应用场景的实现方式(b)中,上述第二图标是用户从第一控件中的中选择的应用图标或者文件夹。具体的,如图25A所示,在图23所示的S2303之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S2501:In implementation (b) of such an application scenario, the second icon is an application icon or folder selected by the user from among the first controls. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25A, before the S2303 shown in FIG. 23, the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S2501:
S2501、终端响应于用户对第二图标的第三输入,该第三输入用于从第一控件中的中选择第二图标,采用第一预设方式在第一控件中显示第二图标。S2501: The terminal is configured to respond to the third input of the second icon by the user, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and display the second icon in the first control by using the first preset manner.
其中,S2501所述的第三输入和第一预设方式可以参考本申请实施例S1701中的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。For the third input and the first preset manner described in S2501, reference may be made to the detailed description in the embodiment S1701 of the present application, and details are not repeatedly described herein.
示例性的,如图25B中的(a)所示,当用户手指点击第一控件中的“支付宝”图标1801(即第二图标)后,手机100可以采用图25B中的(b)所示的第一预设方式显示被选择的“支付宝”图标1801。随后,手机100可以执行S2303,即当用户手指点击图25B中的(b)所示的空闲位置2501(即第一显示位置)后,手机100可以将第一控件中的“支付宝”图标1801(即用户从第一控件中的中选择的应用图标或者文件夹)移动至该空闲位置2501上显示,即显示图25B中的(c)所示的显示页面。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 25B, when the user clicks the "Alipay" icon 1801 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the method shown in (b) of FIG. 25B. The first preset mode displays the selected "Alipay" icon 1801. Subsequently, the mobile phone 100 can execute S2303, that is, after the user clicks on the idle position 2501 (ie, the first display position) shown in (b) of FIG. 25B, the mobile phone 100 can display the "Alipay" icon 1801 in the first control ( That is, the user moves from the application icon or folder selected in the first control to the idle position 2501, that is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 25B is displayed.
在本申请实施例的另一种应用场景中,上述第一显示位置并不是空闲位置,该第一显示位置上显示有第三图标。例如,如图27中的(a)所示,该第一显示位置可以是QQ图标2601对应的显示位置,该显示位置上显示有第三图标(即QQ图标2601)。In another application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the first display position is not an idle position, and the third display icon is displayed on the first display position. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 27, the first display position may be a display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601, and a third icon (ie, the QQ icon 2601) is displayed on the display position.
需要强调的是,在这种应用场景中,第二图标可以是应用图标或者文件夹图标,第三图标可以是应用图标或者文件夹图标。在这种应用场景中,如图26所示,在图25A所示的S2303之前,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S2601:It should be emphasized that in this application scenario, the second icon may be an application icon or a folder icon, and the third icon may be an application icon or a folder icon. In this application scenario, as shown in FIG. 26, before the S2303 shown in FIG. 25A, the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S2601:
S2601、终端响应于用户对第一显示位置的第二输入,将第三图标由第一显示位置移动至第一控件中显示。S2601: The terminal moves the third icon from the first display position to the first control in response to the second input of the user to the first display position.
示例性的,如图27中的(a)所示,手机100可以执行S2501,即当用户手指点击第一控件中的“实用工具”图标701(即第二图标)后,手机100可以采用图27中的(b)所示的第一预设方式显示被选择的“实用工具”图标701。随后,手机100可以响应于用户对第一显示位置的第二输入,同时执行S2303和S2601,即当用户手指点击图27中的(b)所示的QQ图标2601对应的显示位置(即第一显示位置)后,手机100可以将第一控件中的“实用工具”图标701(即用户从第一控件中的中选择的应用图标或者文件夹)移动至QQ图标2601对应的显示位置上显示,将QQ图标2601(即第三图标)由QQ图标2601对应的显示位置(即第一显示位置)移动至第一控件中显示。即显示图27中的(c)所示的显示页面。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 27, the mobile phone 100 can execute S2501, that is, when the user clicks the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the map. The first preset mode shown in (b) of 27 displays the selected "utility" icon 701. Subsequently, the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously execute S2303 and S2601 in response to the second input of the user to the first display position, that is, when the user clicks the display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601 shown in (b) of FIG. 27 (ie, the first After the location is displayed, the mobile phone 100 may move the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the application icon or folder selected by the user from the first control) in the first control to the display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601. The QQ icon 2601 (ie, the third icon) is moved from the display position corresponding to the QQ icon 2601 (ie, the first display position) to the display in the first control. That is, the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 27 is displayed.
在本申请实施例的另一种应用场景中,上述第一显示位置上显示有第三图标,且该第三图标是文件夹图标,第二图标是应用图标。在这种情况下,终端可以响应于用户对所述第一显示位置的所述第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示的文件夹图标中显示。具体的,如图28所示,图26所示的S2601可以替换为S2801:In another application scenario of the embodiment of the present application, the third icon is displayed on the first display location, and the third icon is a folder icon, and the second icon is an application icon. In this case, the terminal may move the second icon in the first control to display in the folder icon displayed on the first display position in response to the user's second input to the first display position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, S2601 shown in FIG. 26 can be replaced with S2801:
S2801:终端响应于用户对第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示的文件夹图标中显示。S2801: The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the folder icon displayed on the first display position in response to the second input of the user to the first display position.
其中,S2801中的第二输入和第一显示位置可以参考本申请实施例上述实施例中,对第二输入和第一显示位置的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。 For the second input and the first display position in the S2801, reference may be made to the detailed description of the second input and the first display position in the foregoing embodiment of the present application, which is not described herein again.
示例性的,如图29中的(a)所示,手机100可以执行S2501,即当用户手指点击第一控件中的“支付宝”图标1801(即第二图标)后,手机100可以采用图29中的(b)所示的第一预设方式显示被选择的“支付宝”图标1801。随后,手机100可以响应于用户对第一显示位置的第二输入,同时执行S2303和S2801,即当用户手指点击图29中的(b)所示的“财务”图标2901对应的显示位置(即第一显示位置)后,手机100可以将第一控件中的“支付宝”图标1801(即用户从第一控件中的中选择的应用图标)移动至“财务”图标2901中显示,即显示图29中的(c)所示的显示页面。其中,相比于图29中的(a)所示的“财务”图标2901和图29中的(b)所示的“财务”图标2901,图29中的(c)所示的“财务”图标2901中还包括“支付宝”图标1801。例如,当用户点击图29中的(c)所示的“财务”图标2901后,手机100可以显示图29中的(d)所示文件夹窗口2902,该文件夹窗口2902中不仅包括“工商银行”图标、“中国银行”图标,还包括“支付宝”图标。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 29, the mobile phone 100 may execute S2501, that is, when the user clicks the "Alipay" icon 1801 (ie, the second icon) in the first control, the mobile phone 100 may adopt FIG. The first preset mode shown in (b) of the middle displays the selected "Alipay" icon 1801. Subsequently, the mobile phone 100 can simultaneously execute S2303 and S2801 in response to the user's second input to the first display position, that is, when the user's finger clicks on the display position corresponding to the "finance" icon 2901 shown in (b) of FIG. 29 (ie, After the first display position), the mobile phone 100 may move the “Alipay” icon 1801 in the first control (ie, the application icon selected by the user from the first control) to the “Financial” icon 2901, that is, FIG. 29 is displayed. The display page shown in (c). Here, the "finance" shown in (c) of FIG. 29 is compared with the "finance" icon 2901 shown in (a) of FIG. 29 and the "finance" icon 2901 shown in (b) of FIG. An "Alipay" icon 1801 is also included in the icon 2901. For example, when the user clicks on the "finance" icon 2901 shown in (c) of FIG. 29, the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 2902 shown in (d) of FIG. 29, which includes not only "business The Bank icon, the Bank of China icon, and the Alipay icon.
本申请实施例提供的移动应用图标的方法,终端可以响应于第一指令,启动第一控件,并在该终端的第一页面上显示用于管理该终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标的第一控件;然后响应于用户对该第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将该第一图标由所述第一页面移动至该第一控件中显示;随后,该终端便可以响应于用户对目标显示页面(即第二页面)中的第一显示位置的第二输入,将该第一控件中的第二图标针对性的移动至该第二页面中的第一显示位置。即终端可以选择性的将第一控件中的第二图标,移动至第二页面中用户指定的显示位置,实现了应用图标或者文件夹图标的精确移动。In the method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may start the first control in response to the first instruction, and display an application icon and a folder in the display page for managing the terminal on the first page of the terminal. a first control of the icon; then, in response to the user's first input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon from the first page to the first control; subsequently, the terminal The second icon in the first control may be targeted to the first display position in the second page in response to the second input of the first display position in the target display page (ie, the second page) by the user. . That is, the terminal can selectively move the second icon in the first control to the display position specified by the user in the second page, thereby realizing precise movement of the application icon or the folder icon.
本申请实施例提供一种移动应用图标的方法,如图30所示,该移动应用图标的方法包括S3001-S3004:The embodiment of the present application provides a method for moving an application icon. As shown in FIG. 30, the method for moving an application icon includes S3001-S3004:
S3001、终端响应于第一指令,在终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,该第一控件用于管理该终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,该第一指令用于指示该终端启动第一控件。S3001: The terminal displays, in response to the first instruction, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate the The terminal starts the first control.
其中,本申请实施例中S3001的详细描述可以参考上述实施例中对S401的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。For a detailed description of the S3001 in the embodiment of the present application, refer to the detailed description of the S401 in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
举例来说,终端响应于第一指令,可以显示如图14中的(a)所示的第一控件1301。或者,终端响应于该第一指令,可以显示如图31中的(a)所示的第一控件3101,该第一控件3101相比于图5中的(c)所示的第一控件503,不仅包括“控件存储区域”504、“落下”按钮505、“左移”按钮506和“右移”按钮507,还包括“文件夹”按钮3101。该“文件夹”按钮3101用于在第一控件中显示该终端中的至少一个文件夹图标。For example, the terminal may display the first control 1301 as shown in (a) of FIG. 14 in response to the first instruction. Alternatively, in response to the first instruction, the terminal may display the first control 3101 as shown in (a) of FIG. 31, the first control 3101 being compared to the first control 503 shown in (c) of FIG. It includes not only a "control storage area" 504, a "drop" button 505, a "left shift" button 506, and a "right shift" button 507, but also a "folder" button 3101. The "folder" button 3101 is for displaying at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control.
S3002、终端响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在上述第一控件中显示该终端中的至少一个文件夹图标。S3002: The terminal displays at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user.
其中,终端中的至少一个文件夹图标可以包括:该终端中的所有显示页面中的文件夹图标,或者该终端的当前显示页面(如第一页面)的文件夹图标。本申请实施例对此不作限制。本申请实施例后续实施例以“终端中的至少一个文件夹图标”包括该终端中的所有显示界面文件夹图标为例,对本申请实施例的方法进行举例说明。The at least one folder icon in the terminal may include: a folder icon in all display pages in the terminal, or a folder icon of a current display page (such as a first page) of the terminal. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this. The following is a description of the method in the embodiment of the present application, in which the "at least one folder icon in the terminal" includes all the display interface folder icons in the terminal as an example.
示例性的,以终端是图1所示的手机100为例,该手机100包括三个显示页面, 即显示页面101、显示页面102和显示页面103。该手机100中包括两个文件夹图标:“实用工具”图标701和“财务”图标2901。Exemplarily, the mobile terminal 100 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and the mobile phone 100 includes three display pages. That is, the page 101, the display page 102, and the display page 103 are displayed. The mobile phone 100 includes two folder icons: a "utility" icon 701 and a "finance" icon 2901.
举例来说,S3002中的第一输入可以是用户在图14中的(a)所示的第一控件1301上输入预设手势。例如,用户对第一控件的第一输入可以是用户在图14中的(a)所示的第一控件1301上输入由下向上的滑动轨迹。该第一输入区别于S403中用户对第一控件的第二输入。For example, the first input in S3002 may be that the user inputs a preset gesture on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. For example, the user's first input to the first control may be that the user inputs a sliding trajectory from bottom to top on the first control 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. The first input is different from the second input of the first control by the user in S403.
或者,S3002中的第一输入还可以是用户对图31中的(a)所示的第一控件3101中的“文件夹”按钮3101的点击操作,如单击操作。例如,当用户点击图31中的(a)所示的第一控件3101中的“文件夹”按钮3101后,如图31中的(b)所示,手机100可以在第一控件503中显示“实用工具”图标701和“财务”图标2901。Alternatively, the first input in S3002 may also be a click operation, such as a click operation, by the user on the "folder" button 3101 in the first control 3101 shown in (a) of FIG. For example, when the user clicks the "Folder" button 3101 in the first control 3101 shown in (a) of FIG. 31, as shown in (b) of FIG. 31, the mobile phone 100 can be displayed in the first control 503. "Utilities" icon 701 and "Finance" icon 2901.
S3003、终端响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,该第二输入用于选择第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标。S3003. The terminal responds to a second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, and the selected first file is displayed in a first preset manner. Clip icon.
其中,用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,可以是用户对第一文件夹图标的点击操作。例如,该第二输入可以是用户对图31中的(b)所示的“实用工具”图标701的单击操作。S3003中的第一预设方式可以参考上述实施例中的第一预设方式,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。The second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user may be a click operation of the first folder icon by the user. For example, the second input may be a user click operation of the "utility" icon 701 shown in (b) of FIG. For the first preset mode in the S3003, reference may be made to the first preset mode in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not repeatedly described herein.
示例性的,当用户点击图31中的(b)所示的“实用工具”图标701(即第一文件夹图标)后,手机100可以采用图31中的(c)所示的第一预设方式,显示该“实用工具”图标701。Exemplarily, when the user clicks the "Utilities" icon 701 (ie, the first folder icon) shown in (b) of FIG. 31, the mobile phone 100 can adopt the first pre-show shown in (c) of FIG. Set the mode to display the "Utility" icon 701.
S3004、终端响应于用户对第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入,将第一图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。S3004. The terminal moves the first icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the third input of the first icon in the first page by the user.
其中,用户对第一页面上显示的第一图标的第三输入可以是用户对该第一图标的点击操作。例如,该第三输入可以是用户对图32中的(a)所示的”共享单车”图标3201的单击操作。当用户点击图32中的(a)所示的“共享单车”图标3201(第一图标)后,手机100则可以将该“共享单车”图标3201移动至“实用工具”图标701(即第一文件夹图标)对应的文件夹中显示,即显示图32(b)所示的显示页面。The third input of the first icon displayed by the user on the first page may be a click operation of the first icon by the user. For example, the third input may be a click operation of the user on the "shared bicycle" icon 3201 shown in (a) of FIG. When the user clicks the "share bicycle" icon 3201 (first icon) shown in (a) of FIG. 32, the mobile phone 100 can move the "shared bicycle" icon 3201 to the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the first The folder icon is displayed in the corresponding folder, that is, the display page shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed.
例如,当用户点击图32中的(b)所示的“实用工具”图标701后,手机100可以显示图32中的(c)所示的文件夹窗口3202,该文件夹窗口3202中不仅包括“时钟”图标、“备忘录”图标、“日历”图标和“指南针”图标,还包括“共享单车”图标。For example, when the user clicks the "Utility" icon 701 shown in (b) of FIG. 32, the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3202 shown in (c) of FIG. 32, which includes not only the folder window 3202 The Clock icon, Memo icon, Calendar icon, and Compass icon also include the Shared Bike icon.
本申请实施例提供的移动应用图标的方法,终端可以响应于用户对该第一控件的第一输入,在该第一控件中显示该终端中的至少一个文件夹图标。如此,用户便可以在该第一控件中查看到该终端中的多个文件夹图标,并选择性的将第一页面中的第一图标移动至用户选择的文件夹图标(即第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹)中显示。通过本方案,可以避免在将第一图标移动至某个文件夹时,需要用户频繁的切换终端的显示页面,以查找目标文件夹的问题,可以提高应用图标的管理效率。In the method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input of the first control by the user. In this way, the user can view the plurality of folder icons in the terminal in the first control, and selectively move the first icon in the first page to the folder icon selected by the user (ie, the first folder) The icon corresponds to the folder). With this solution, when the first icon is moved to a certain folder, the user needs to frequently switch the display page of the terminal to find the target folder, and the management efficiency of the application icon can be improved.
进一步的,终端还可以响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的任一文件夹图标的输入,展开显示该文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标。具体的,如图33所示,在图30所示的S3002之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S3301: Further, the terminal may further expand and display an application icon in the folder corresponding to the folder icon in response to the user inputting any one of the at least one folder icon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, after S3002 shown in FIG. 30, the method in this embodiment may further include S3301:
S3301、终端响应于用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,显示第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标。S3301: The terminal displays an application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to the fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user.
其中,该第四输入与S3003所述的第二输入不同。例如,当S3003所述的第二输入是用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的任一文件夹图标的单击操作时,该第四输入则可以是用户对至少一个文件夹图标中的任一文件夹图标的双击操作或者长按。The fourth input is different from the second input described in S3003. For example, when the second input described in S3003 is a click operation of the user on any one of the at least one folder icon, the fourth input may be any file in the user to the at least one folder icon. Double-click the icon or press and hold.
示例性的,当用户双击图34中的(a)所示的“财务”图标2901(第二文件夹图标)后,手机100可以显示“财务”图标2901对应的文件夹中的应用图标,如图34中的(b)所示的文件夹窗口3401中的“工商银行”图标、“中国银行”图标和“支付宝”图标。Exemplarily, when the user double-clicks the "finance" icon 2901 (second folder icon) shown in (a) of FIG. 34, the mobile phone 100 may display an application icon in a folder corresponding to the "finance" icon 2901, such as The "ICBC" icon, the "Bank of China" icon, and the "Alipay" icon in the folder window 3401 shown in (b) of FIG.
进一步的,终端还可以响应于用户对第一页面中的任一图标(如第二图标)的第五输入,由所述第一页面移动至第一控件中显示。具体的,如图35所示,在图30所示的S3003之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S3501:Further, the terminal may also be moved by the first page to be displayed in the first control in response to the user's fifth input to any icon (eg, the second icon) in the first page. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, after S3003 shown in FIG. 30, the method in this embodiment may further include S3501:
S3501、终端响应于用户对第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,将第二图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第二图标为上述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。S3501: The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control in response to the fifth input of the second icon in the first page by the user, where the second icon is an application icon in the first page or Folder icon.
其中,S3501中“终端响应于用户对第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,将第二图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示”的方法,可以参考S402中终端“响应于用户对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将该第一图标由上述第一页面移动至第一控件中显示”的方法、图6,以及图7所示的显示页面,本申请实施例这里不再详细赘述。In the method of “the terminal responds to the fifth input of the second icon in the first page by the user, the second icon is moved from the first page to the first control” in S3501, reference may be made to the terminal “responsive to the terminal in S402”. a method in which the user inputs the first icon in the first page, the first icon is moved from the first page to the first control, the method shown in FIG. 6, and the display page shown in FIG. The application examples are not described in detail herein.
进一步的,在S3501之后,终端还可以响应于用户对该第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,将被选择的第三图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。该第六输入用于从第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择第三图标。具体的,如图35所示,在S3501之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S3502:Further, after S3501, the terminal may further move the selected third icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user. The sixth input is for selecting a third icon from an application icon or a folder icon in the first control. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, after S3501, the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S3502:
S3502、终端响应于用户对第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,该第六输入用于从第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择该第三图标,将被选择的第三图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。S3502, the terminal is responsive to a sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user, the sixth input is used to select the third icon from the application icon or the folder icon in the first control, and the selected The three icons are displayed in the folder corresponding to the first folder icon.
其中,该用户对第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,可以是用户对该第三图标的点击操作。The sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user may be a click operation of the third icon by the user.
举例来说,上述第六输入可以是用户对图36A中的(a)所示的”共享单车”图标3201的单击操作。当用户点击图36A中的(a)所示的“共享单车”图标3201(第三图标)后,手机100则可以将该“共享单车”图标3201移动至“实用工具”图标701(即第一文件夹图标)对应的文件夹中显示,即显示图36A(b)所示的显示页面。For example, the sixth input described above may be a user's click operation on the "shared bicycle" icon 3201 shown in (a) of FIG. 36A. When the user clicks the "share bicycle" icon 3201 (third icon) shown in (a) of FIG. 36A, the mobile phone 100 can move the "shared bicycle" icon 3201 to the "utility" icon 701 (ie, the first The folder icon is displayed in the corresponding folder, that is, the display page shown in FIG. 36A(b) is displayed.
例如,当用户点击图36A中的(b)所示的“实用工具”图标701后,手机100可以显示图36A中的(c)所示文件夹窗口3202,该文件夹窗口3202中不仅包括“时钟”图标、“备忘录”图标、“日历”图标和“指南针”图标,还包括“共享单车”图标。For example, when the user clicks the "Utility" icon 701 shown in (b) of FIG. 36A, the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3202 shown in (c) of FIG. 36A, which includes not only " The Clock icon, Memo icon, Calendar icon, and Compass icon also include the Shared Bike icon.
举例来说,如图36B中的(a)所示,第一控件503中包括以下第三图标:“天气”图标、“支付宝”图标和“社交”图标3601,手机100采用第一预设方式显示“实用工具”图标。当用户手指点击第一控件503中的“社交”图标3601后,手机100可以将“社交”图标3601(即文件夹的图标)对应的文件夹合并至“实用工具”3604对应的文件夹,显示图36B中的(b)所示的显示页面。例如,当用户点击图36B中的(b)所示的“实 用工具”图标3604后,手机100可以显示图36B中的(c)所示文件夹窗口3605,该文件夹窗口3605中不仅包括“时钟”图标、“备忘录”图标、“日历”图标和“指南针”图标,还包括“微信”图标。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 36B, the first control 503 includes the following third icons: a "weather" icon, an "Alipay" icon, and a "social" icon 3601, and the mobile phone 100 adopts a first preset manner. The Utility icon is displayed. After the user clicks the "social" icon 3601 in the first control 503, the mobile phone 100 may merge the folder corresponding to the "social" icon 3601 (ie, the icon of the folder) into the folder corresponding to the "utility" 3604, and display The display page shown in (b) of Fig. 36B. For example, when the user clicks on the "real" shown in (b) of FIG. 36B After using the tool icon 3604, the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3605 shown in (c) of FIG. 36B, which includes not only the "clock" icon, the "memo" icon, the "calendar" icon, and the "compass". "icon, also includes the "WeChat" icon.
进一步的,终端还可以响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,如图31中的(b)、图31中的(c)或者图37中的(a)所示,在该第一控件503中显示新建文件夹图标3102,该新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹。具体的,在上述S3001之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S3701-S3703:Further, the terminal may further respond to the first input of the first control by the user, as shown in (b) of FIG. 31, (c) of FIG. 31 or (a) of FIG. 37, in the first control. A new folder icon 3102 is displayed in 503, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder. Specifically, after the foregoing S3001, the method in the embodiment of the present application may further include S3701-S3703:
S3701、终端响应于用户对第一控件的第一输入,在该第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标。S3701: The terminal displays a new folder icon in the first control in response to the user's first input to the first control.
S3702、终端响应于用户对新建文件夹图标的输入,在第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项。S3702: The terminal displays a folder name input item of the new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the new folder icon.
其中,用户对新建文件夹图标的输入可以为用户对该新建文件夹图标的点击操作,如单击操作。例如,当用户点击图37中的(a)所示的新建文件夹图标3102后,手机100可以显示图37中的(b)所示的显示页面,图37中的(b)所示的显示页面中包括“文件夹名称输入项”3701和“输入键盘”3702,该“输入键盘”3702用于在“文件夹名称输入项”3701中输入上述新的文件夹的名称。The user input to the newly created folder icon may be a click operation performed by the user on the newly created folder icon, such as a click operation. For example, when the user clicks the new folder icon 3102 shown in (a) of FIG. 37, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (b) of FIG. 37, and the display shown in (b) of FIG. The page includes a "folder name input item" 3701 and an "input keyboard" 3702 for inputting the name of the above new folder in the "folder name input item" 3701.
S3703、终端响应于用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入,在上述第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。S3703. The terminal displays the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
示例性的,如图37中的(c)所示,当用户在“文件夹名称输入项”3701中输入上述新的文件夹的名称“社交”,并点击“输入键盘”3702中的“OK”按钮后,手机100可以显示图37中的(d)所示的显示页面。在图37中的(d)所示的显示页面中,第一控件503中增加了“社交”图标3704,第一页面103中增加了“社交”图标3703。Exemplarily, as shown in (c) of FIG. 37, when the user inputs the name "social" of the above new folder in the "folder name input item" 3701, and clicks "OK in the input keyboard" 3702. After the button, the mobile phone 100 can display the display page shown in (d) of FIG. In the display page shown in (d) of FIG. 37, a "social" icon 3704 is added to the first control 503, and a "social" icon 3703 is added to the first page 103.
可选的,本申请实施例中,终端还可以根据用户选择的应用图标对应的应用程序的名称,自动查找与该应用程序的名称匹配的文件夹名称。例如,应用程序“微信”、“QQ”等对应的文件夹名称可以为“社交”,应用程序“支付宝”、“中国银行”、“招商银行”等对应的文件夹名称可以为“财务”,应用程序“爱奇艺”、“优酷”等对应的文件夹名称可以为“视频”。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal may also automatically search for a folder name that matches the name of the application according to the name of the application corresponding to the application icon selected by the user. For example, the corresponding folder name of the application "WeChat", "QQ", etc. may be "social", and the corresponding folder name of the application "Alipay", "Bank of China", "China Merchants Bank", etc. may be "finance". The corresponding folder name of the application "Iqiyi", "Youku", etc. can be "video".
示例性的,如图38中的(a)所示,当用户沿滑动轨迹3802拖动第一页面中的“微信”图标3801至“新建文件夹图标”3102后,或者如图38中的(b)所示,当用户沿滑动轨迹3803拖动第一控件中的“微信”图标3801至“新建文件夹图标”3102后,手机100可以查找到与该“微信”图标3801对应的文件夹名称为“社交”。如此,手机100则可以新建一个名为“社交”的文件夹,并将该“微信”图标3801包括在该“社交”的文件夹的图标(“社交”图标),并显示图38中的(c)所示的显示页面。其中,在图38中的(c)所示的显示页面中,第一页面103中包括“社交”图标3805。其中,该“社交”图标3805中包括“微信”图标3801。例如,当用户点击图38中的(c)所示的“社交”图标3805后,手机100可以显示图38中的(d)所示文件夹窗口3806,该文件夹窗口3806中包括“微信”图标3801。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 38, when the user drags the "WeChat" icon 3801 to the "New Folder Icon" 3102 in the first page along the sliding track 3802, or as shown in FIG. 38 ( b), after the user drags the "WeChat" icon 3801 to the "New Folder Icon" 3102 in the first control along the sliding track 3803, the mobile phone 100 can find the folder name corresponding to the "WeChat" icon 3801. For "social." In this way, the mobile phone 100 can create a new folder named "social", and include the "WeChat" icon 3801 in the icon of the "social" folder ("social" icon), and display the image in FIG. 38 ( c) The display page shown. Among them, in the display page shown in (c) of FIG. 38, the first page 103 includes a "social" icon 3805. The "social" icon 3805 includes a "WeChat" icon 3801. For example, when the user clicks the "social" icon 3805 shown in (c) of FIG. 38, the mobile phone 100 can display the folder window 3806 shown in (d) of FIG. 38, which includes "WeChat" in the folder window 3806. Icon 3801.
本申请实施例提供的移动应用图标的方法,不仅可以避免在将第一图标移动至某个文件夹时,需要用户频繁的切换终端的显示页面,以查找目标文件夹的问题,提高 应用图标的管理效率;还可以通过第一控件,在终端的显示页面上新建文件夹。The method for moving an application icon provided by the embodiment of the present application can not only avoid the need for the user to frequently switch the display page of the terminal when the first icon is moved to a certain folder, so as to find the problem of the target folder and improve the problem. The management efficiency of the application icon; it is also possible to create a new folder on the display page of the terminal through the first control.
需要说明的是,本申请上述实施例中所述第一控件的所有功能,可以集成在一个第一控件中实现,即上述实施例中所述的终端的所有功能,都可以集成在一个包括上述第一控件的终端中实现。It should be noted that all the functions of the first control in the foregoing embodiment of the present application may be implemented in a first control, that is, all the functions of the terminal described in the foregoing embodiments may be integrated into one, including the foregoing. Implemented in the terminal of the first control.
可以理解的是,上述终端等为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本发明实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明实施例的范围。It can be understood that, in order to implement the above functions, the above terminal and the like include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that the embodiments of the present invention can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in combination with the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the embodiments of the invention.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对上述终端等进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本发明实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiment of the present application may perform the division of the function modules on the terminal or the like according to the foregoing method example. For example, each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present invention is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图39示出了上述实施例中所涉及的终端的一种可能的结构示意图,该终端3900包括:输入单元3901和显示单元3902。其中,输入单元3901用于接收用户在终端的显示页面上的输入,如第一输入、第二输入、第三输入等,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。例如,输入单元3901可以用于接收用户对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,接收用户对上述第一控件的第二输入。FIG. 39 shows a possible structural diagram of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment, and the terminal 3900 includes an input unit 3901 and a display unit 3902. The input unit 3901 is configured to receive input of a user on a display page of the terminal, such as a first input, a second input, a third input, etc., and/or other processes for the techniques described herein. For example, the input unit 3901 can be configured to receive a first input of the first icon in the first page by the user, and receive a second input from the user to the first control.
显示单元3902用于支持终端方法实施例中的S401-S403、S1501、S1701-S1702、S2101、S2201、S2301-S2303、S2501、S2601、S2801、S3001-S3004、S3301、S3501-S3502、S3701-S3703,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。The display unit 3902 is configured to support S401-S403, S1501, S1701-S1702, S2101, S2201, S2301-S2303, S2501, S2601, S2801, S3001-S3004, S3301, S3501-S3502, S3701-S3703 in the terminal method embodiment, And/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。All the related content of the steps involved in the foregoing method embodiments may be referred to the functional descriptions of the corresponding functional modules, and details are not described herein again.
当然,终端3900包括但不限于上述所列举的单元模块,例如,终端3900还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元用于保存终端中的各个应用程序的相关数据,如显示单元3901所显示的各个应用程序的图标,第一控件的图标等。终端3900还可以包括用于向其他设备发送数据或者信号的发送单元,接收其他设备发送数据或者信号的接收单元等。终端3900还可以包括计算单元,该计算单元用于计算用户对上述显示单元所显示的页面或者第一控件的输入所对应的触摸点坐标。并且,上述功能单元的具体所能够实现的功能也包括但不限于上述实例所述的方法步骤对应的功能,终端3900的其他单元的详细描述可以参考其所对应方法步骤的详细描述,本申请实施例这里不再赘述。Of course, the terminal 3900 includes, but is not limited to, the unit modules listed above. For example, the terminal 3900 may further include a storage unit for storing related data of each application in the terminal, such as each application displayed by the display unit 3901. The icon of the program, the icon of the first control, etc. The terminal 3900 may further include a transmitting unit for transmitting data or signals to other devices, a receiving unit that receives data or signals transmitted by other devices, and the like. The terminal 3900 may further include a calculating unit, configured to calculate touch point coordinates corresponding to the input of the page or the first control displayed by the display unit. In addition, the functions that can be implemented by the foregoing functional units include, but are not limited to, the functions corresponding to the method steps described in the foregoing examples. For detailed descriptions of other units of the terminal 3900, reference may be made to the detailed description of the corresponding method steps. The examples are not described here.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图40示出了上述实施例中所涉及的终端的一种可能的结构示意图。该终端4000包括:处理模块4001、存储模块4002和显示模块4003。处理模块4001用于对电子设备的动作进行控制管理。显示模块4003用于显示处理模块4001生成的图像。存储模块4002,用于保存终端的程序代码和数据。进一步的,该终端4000还可以包括通信模块4004,该通信模块4004用于支持终端与其他网络实 体的通信。In the case of employing an integrated unit, FIG. 40 shows a possible structural diagram of the terminal involved in the above embodiment. The terminal 4000 includes a processing module 4001, a storage module 4002, and a display module 4003. The processing module 4001 is configured to control and manage the actions of the electronic device. The display module 4003 is configured to display an image generated by the processing module 4001. The storage module 4002 is configured to save program codes and data of the terminal. Further, the terminal 4000 may further include a communication module 4004, which is used to support the terminal and other networks. Body communication.
其中,处理模块4001可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP),专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本发明公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。通信模块1303可以是收发器、收发电路或通信接口等。存储模块1301可以是存储器。The processing module 4001 may be a processor or a controller, for example, may be a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), and an application specific integrated circuit (Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It is possible to implement or carry out the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure. The processor may also be a combination of computing functions, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like. The communication module 1303 may be a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, a communication interface, or the like. The storage module 1301 may be a memory.
当处理模块4001为处理器(如图3所示的处理器380),通信模块4004为RF收发电路(如图3所示的RF电路310),存储模块4002为存储器(如图3所示的存储器320),显示模块4003为触摸屏(包括图3所示的触控面板331和显示面板341)时,本发明实施例所提供的终端可以为图3所示的终端100。其中,上述通信模块4004不仅可以包括RF收发电路,还可以包括WiFi模块和蓝牙模块。RF收发电路、WiFi模块和蓝牙模块等通信模块可以统称为通信接口。其中,上述处理器、通信接口、触摸屏和存储区可以通过总线耦合在一起。When the processing module 4001 is a processor (such as the processor 380 shown in FIG. 3), the communication module 4004 is an RF transceiver circuit (such as the RF circuit 310 shown in FIG. 3), and the storage module 4002 is a memory (as shown in FIG. 3). In the memory 320), when the display module 4003 is a touch screen (including the touch panel 331 and the display panel 341), the terminal provided by the embodiment of the present invention may be the terminal 100 shown in FIG. The communication module 4004 may include not only an RF transceiver circuit but also a WiFi module and a Bluetooth module. Communication modules such as RF transceiver circuits, WiFi modules, and Bluetooth modules can be collectively referred to as communication interfaces. Wherein, the above processor, communication interface, touch screen and storage area can be coupled together by a bus.
参考附图5-14、16、18-20和22所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种图形用户界面(GUI),该GUI存储在终端中,该终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,该一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在该存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。该GUI包括:如图5中的(c)所示,响应于第一指令,在上述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,该第一页面可以是终端包括的多个页面中的任意一个。如图6中的(a)-(b)或者图7中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,在触摸屏上将第一图标由一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。如图8中的(a)-(b)、图9中的(b)-(c)、图10中的(a)-(b)、图13中的(a)-(b)或者图14中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对上述第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的第二图标移动至触摸屏的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,该第二图标是上述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。Referring to Figures 5-14, 16, 18-20, and 22, the embodiment of the present application further provides a graphical user interface (GUI) stored in a terminal, the terminal including a touch screen, a memory, and one or more A processor for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory. The GUI includes: displaying a first page including a first control on the touch screen, as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, the first page may be any one of a plurality of pages included in the terminal One. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 6 or (a)-(b) of FIG. 7, in response to the first input to the first icon in the first page, the first on the touch screen The icon is moved from a page to a first control, the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page. (a)-(b) in FIG. 8, (b)-(c) in FIG. 9, (a)-(b) in FIG. 10, (a)-(b) or in FIG. In (a)-(b) of FIG. 14, in response to the second input to the first control, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the touch screen on the touch screen, The second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
进一步的,上述第二页面与第一页面相同,第二输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,并指示终端将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。上述GUI还包括:如图16中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于用户对第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,在触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至第二页面的空闲位置上显示。Further, the second page is the same as the first page, and the second input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and instruct the terminal to move the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display. The GUI further includes: in response to the second input of the second icon in the first control by the user, as shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 16, moving the selected second icon to the first screen on the touch screen The two pages are displayed in the free position.
进一步的,上述GUI还包括:在响应于对第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前,如图18中的(a)-(b)或者图19中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,第三输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,在触摸屏上采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标;响应于对第一控件的第二输入,在触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,其中,第二输入与第三输入不同。Further, the GUI further includes: before moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first control, as shown in FIG. 18 (a)-(b) or (a)-(b) in FIG. 19, in response to a third input to the second icon in the first control, the third input is used to select from the first control a second icon, displaying the selected second icon on the touch screen in a first preset manner; moving the selected second icon on the touch screen to the second page of the terminal in response to the second input to the first control Displayed in an idle position, wherein the second input is different from the third input.
进一步的,上述第二页面与第一页面不同,且第二页面是在第一侧与第一页面相邻的显示页面,第一侧是左侧或者右侧。上述GUI还包括:如图20中的(a)-(d) 或者图22中的(a)-(c)所示,响应于对第一控件的第二输入,当第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并在触摸屏上将第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至触摸屏的第三页面的空闲位置上显示。其中,第三页面是在第一侧与第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者第三页面是第一页面。Further, the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on the first side, and the first side is the left side or the right side. The above GUI also includes: (a)-(d) in FIG. Or (a)-(c) in FIG. 22, in response to the second input to the first control, when the number M of idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control Moving the M second icons in the first control to the M free positions of the second page on the touch screen, and moving the remaining NM icons in the first control to the touch screen on the touch screen The third page is displayed on the free location. The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
进一步的,上述GUI还包括:在上述触摸屏所显示的第一页面上悬浮显示第一控件。并且,上述GUI还包括:如图11中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对第一控件的移动手势,按照移动手势的滑动轨迹,在触摸屏所显示的第一页面上移动显示第一控件。Further, the GUI further includes: floating the first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen. Moreover, the GUI further includes: in accordance with (a)-(b) in FIG. 11, in response to the moving gesture to the first control, moving the display on the first page displayed on the touch screen according to the sliding trajectory of the moving gesture The first control.
进一步的,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件的面积小于在触摸屏上显示的第一页面的面积。进一步的,上述GUI还包括:在响应于第一输入,将第一图标由第一页面移动至第一控件中显示的过程中,在触摸屏上显示第一图标逐渐变小的动态图像。Further, the area of the first control displayed on the touch screen is smaller than the area of the first page displayed on the touch screen. Further, the GUI further includes: moving the first icon from the first page to the display in the first control in response to the first input, and displaying the dynamic image that the first icon is gradually reduced on the touch screen.
进一步的,如图12中的(a)-(b)所示,当第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,第一控件的面积小于第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时第一控件的面积。Further, as shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 12, when the application icon and/or the folder icon are not included in the first control, the area of the first control is smaller than the application icon and/or included in the first control. Or the area of the first control when the folder icon.
参考附图24、25B、27和29所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种图形用户界面(GUI),该GUI存储在终端中,该终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,该一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在该存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。该GUI包括:如图5中的(c)所示,响应于第一指令,在上述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,该第一页面可以是终端的Home screen,当然也可以是终端的其他显示页面。如图6中的(a)-(b)或者图7中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对上述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,在触摸屏上将第一图标由一页面移动至第一控件中显示,该第一图标为第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。如图24中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于用户对第二页面上的第一显示位置的第二输入,将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示,该第二图标是第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;该第一显示位置是空闲位置,或者该第一显示位置上显示有第三图标;该第三图标是应用图标或者文件夹图标。Referring to Figures 24, 25B, 27, and 29, an embodiment of the present application further provides a graphical user interface (GUI) stored in a terminal, the terminal including a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors. The one or more processors are for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory. The GUI includes: as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, in response to the first instruction, displaying a first page including the first control on the touch screen, the first page may be a Home screen of the terminal, or may be Other display pages of the terminal. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 6 or (a)-(b) of FIG. 7, in response to the first input to the first icon in the first page, the first on the touch screen The icon is moved from a page to a first control, the first icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 24, in response to the user's second input to the first display position on the second page, moving the second icon in the first control to the first display position The second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first control; the first display position is an idle position, or a third icon is displayed on the first display position; the third icon is an application icon or a folder icon.
进一步的,上述第二图标是上述第一控件中、第一个被移动至该第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。在这种可能的实现方式中,上述GUI还包括:如图25B中的(a)所示,响应于对第二图标的第三输入,该第三输入用于从第一控件中选择第二图标,在触摸屏上采用第一预设方式在上述第一控件中显示该第二图标。Further, the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon that is moved to the first control in the first control. In this possible implementation, the GUI further includes: in response to the third input to the second icon, the third input is used to select the second one from the first control, as shown in (a) of FIG. 25B The icon displays the second icon in the first control in a first preset manner on the touch screen.
进一步的,上述第一显示位置上显示有第三图标,该第三图标可以是应用图标,或者该第三图标可以是文件夹图标。在这种可能的实现方式中,上述GUI还包括:如图26中的(a)-(c)所示,响应于对上述第一显示位置的第二输入,在触摸屏上将该第三图标由上述第一显示位置移动至第一控件中显示。Further, a third icon is displayed on the first display position, the third icon may be an application icon, or the third icon may be a folder icon. In this possible implementation, the GUI further includes: displaying the third icon on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first display position, as shown in (a)-(c) of FIG. Moving from the first display position to the first control.
进一步的,上述第一显示位置上显示有第三图标,该第三图标是文件夹图标。在这种可能的实现方式中,上述GUI还可以包括:如图29中的(a)-(d)所示,响应于对第一显示位置的第二输入,在触摸屏上将第一控件中的第二图标移动至第一显示位置上显示的第三图标中显示。Further, a third icon is displayed on the first display position, and the third icon is a folder icon. In this possible implementation, the GUI may further include: in the first control on the touch screen, in response to the second input to the first display position, as shown in (a)-(d) of FIG. The second icon is moved to display in the third icon displayed on the first display position.
参考附图31-32、34、36A、36B、37和38所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种图 形用户界面(GUI),该GUI存储在终端中,该终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,该一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在该存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。该GUI包括:如图5中的(c)所示,响应于第一指令,在上述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,该第一页面可以是终端的Home screen,当然也可以是终端的其他显示页面。如图31中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对第一控件的第一输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示触摸屏中的至少一个文件夹图标。如图31中的(b)-(c)所示,响应于对至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,第二输入用于选择第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式,在触摸屏上显示被选择的第一文件夹图标。如图32中的(a)-(c)所示,响应于对第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入,在触摸屏上将第一图标移动至第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。Referring to Figures 31-32, 34, 36A, 36B, 37 and 38, the embodiment of the present application further provides a figure. A user interface (GUI), the GUI being stored in a terminal, the terminal comprising a touch screen, a memory, one or more processors for executing one or more computer programs stored in the memory. The GUI includes: as shown in (c) of FIG. 5, in response to the first instruction, displaying a first page including the first control on the touch screen, the first page may be a Home screen of the terminal, or may be Other display pages of the terminal. As shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 31, in response to the first input to the first control, at least one of the touch screens is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen. As shown in (b)-(c) of FIG. 31, in response to a second input to the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, using the first In a preset manner, the selected first folder icon is displayed on the touch screen. As shown in (a)-(c) of FIG. 32, in response to the third input to the first icon in the first page, moving the first icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen display.
进一步的,上述GUI还包括:如图34中的(a)-(b)所示,响应于对至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,在触摸屏上显示第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标,第四输入与第二输入不同。Further, the GUI further includes: displaying the second file on the touch screen in response to the fourth input to the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon, as shown in (a)-(b) of FIG. 34 The application icon in the folder corresponding to the folder icon, the fourth input is different from the second input.
进一步的,上述GUI还包括:如图37中的(a)-(d)或者图38中的(a)-(d)所示,响应于对第一控件的第一输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;响应于对新建文件夹图标的输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;响应于用户对文件夹名称输入项的输入,在触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。Further, the GUI further includes: displaying (1)-(d) in FIG. 37 or (a)-(d) in FIG. 38, displaying on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control The new folder icon is displayed in the first control, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder; in response to the input of the newly created folder icon, the folder name of the new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen. The input item; in response to the user inputting the folder name input item, displaying the named new folder icon in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序代码,当上述处理器执行该计算机程序代码时,该终端执行图4、图15、图17、图21、图23、图25A、图26、图28、图30、图33和图35中任一附图中的相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的移动应用图标的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium, where the computer program code is stored, and when the processor executes the computer program code, the terminal executes FIG. 4, FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 21, and FIG. 23. A method of implementing the method of moving an application in the above-described embodiments by the associated method steps of any of Figures 25A, 26, 28, 30, 33, and 35.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图4、图15、图17、图21、图23、图25A、图26、图28、图30、图33和图35中任一附图中的相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的移动应用图标的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to execute FIG. 4, FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. 21, FIG. 23, FIG. 25A, FIG. 26, FIG. The method of the related method in any of FIG. 30, FIG. 33 and FIG. 35 implements the method of moving the application icon in the above embodiment.
其中,本发明实施例提供的终端3900、终端4000、计算机存储介质或者计算机程序产品均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The terminal 3900, the terminal 4000, the computer storage medium or the computer program product provided by the embodiment of the present invention are all used to perform the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be referred to the above provided. The beneficial effects in the corresponding methods are not described here.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is illustrated. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated according to needs. It is completed by different functional modules, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. For the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above, reference may be made to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请实施例所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可 以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the embodiments of the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be used. Combinations can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be The indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
另外,在本申请实施例各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:快闪存储器、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application may contribute to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage. The medium includes instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes: a flash memory, a mobile hard disk, a read only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes.
以上所述,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the embodiments of the present application, but the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto, and any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present application should be covered. Within the scope of protection of the application examples. Therefore, the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application is subject to the scope of protection of the claims.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种移动应用图标的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for moving an application icon, comprising:
    终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,所述第一控件用于管理所述终端显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述终端启动所述第一控件;And displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the terminal, where the first instruction is used to indicate Said terminal starts said first control;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,将所述第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第一图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;The terminal moves the first icon from the first page to the first control in response to a first input of a first icon in the first page by a user, where the first icon is An application icon or a folder icon in the first page;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,所述第二图标是所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。The terminal moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user, where the second icon is An application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二页面与所述第一页面相同,所述第二输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,并指示所述终端将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示;The method of claim 1, wherein the second page is the same as the first page, the second input is for selecting the second icon from the first control, and indicating the The terminal moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The terminal, in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示。The terminal moves the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page in response to a second input of the second icon in the first control by the user.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the second icon of the first control is moved to a second of the terminal in response to a second input by the user to the first control Before the page is displayed in the idle position, the method further includes:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,所述第三输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标;The terminal is configured to respond to a third input of the second icon in the first control by the user, where the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, and display the first preset manner The second icon selected;
    其中,所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The terminal, in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moves the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示;The terminal moves the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page of the terminal in response to the second input of the first control by the user;
    其中,所述第二输入与所述第三输入不同。Wherein the second input is different from the third input.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二页面与所述第一页面不同,且所述第二页面是在第一侧与所述第一页面相邻的显示页面,所述第一侧是左侧或者右侧;The method according to claim 1, wherein the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on a first side, The first side is the left side or the right side;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The terminal, in response to the second input of the first control by the user, moving the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,当所述第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于所述第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,所述终端将所述第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至所述第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并将所述第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至所述终端的第三页面的空闲位置上显示;Responding to the second input of the first control by the user, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, the terminal Moving the M second icons in the first control to the M free positions of the second page, and moving the remaining NM second icons in the first control to the terminal Displayed on the idle position of the third page;
    其中,所述第三页面是在所述第一侧与所述第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者所述第三页面是所述第一页面。 The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that
    所述第一控件悬浮显示在所述第一页面上;或The first control is displayed floating on the first page; or
    所述第一控件能够在所述第一页面上移动;或The first control is moveable on the first page; or
    所述第一控件的面积小于所述第一页面的面积;或The area of the first control is smaller than the area of the first page; or
    所述第一图标在由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件的过程中逐渐变小;或The first icon gradually becomes smaller during the movement from the first page to the first control; or
    当所述第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,所述第一控件的面积小于所述第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时所述第一控件的面积。When an application icon and/or a folder icon is not included in the first control, an area of the first control is smaller than an area of the first control when the first control includes an application icon and/or a folder icon .
  6. 一种移动应用图标的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for moving an application icon, comprising:
    终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,所述第一控件用于管理所述终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述终端启动所述第一控件;And displaying, by the terminal, a first control on a first page of the terminal, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used by the terminal Instructing the terminal to start the first control;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示所述终端中的至少一个文件夹图标;The terminal displays at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to a first input of the first control by a user;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,所述第二输入用于选择所述第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标;The terminal is responsive to a second input by the user to the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, the second input is used to select the first folder icon, and is displayed in a first preset manner The first folder icon selected;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入,将所述第一图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。The terminal moves the first icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to a third input of the first icon in the first page by the user.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示所述终端中的至少一个文件夹图标之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein after the terminal displays at least one of the terminal icons in the first control in response to a first input of the first control by a user The method further includes:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,显示所述第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标,所述第四输入与所述第二输入不同。The terminal displays an application icon in a folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to a fourth input of the second folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, the fourth input and the The second input is different.
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein after the terminal displays the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction, the method further comprises:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,将所述第二图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第二图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;Responding to the fifth input of the second icon in the first page by the user, the second icon is moved from the first page to the first control, and the second icon is An application icon or a folder icon in the first page;
    在所述终端响应于用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标之后,所述方法还包括:After the terminal displays the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the user, the method further includes:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,所述第六输入用于从所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择所述第三图标,将被选择的第三图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。The terminal is responsive to a sixth input of a third icon of the first control by the user, the sixth input is for selecting the third icon from an application icon or a folder icon in the first control And moving the selected third icon to the folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
  9. 根据权利要求6-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6-8, wherein after the terminal displays the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction, the method further comprises:
    所述终端响应于用户对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,所述新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;The terminal displays a new folder icon in the first control in response to a first input of the first control by the user, and the new folder icon is used to create a new folder;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述新建文件夹图标的输入,在所述第一控件中显示新的 文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;The terminal displays a new one in the first control in response to a user inputting the new folder icon Folder name input of the folder icon;
    所述终端响应于用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入,在所述第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。The terminal displays the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
  10. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:A terminal, comprising:
    显示单元,用于响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,所述第一控件用于管理所述显示单元显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述终端启动所述第一控件;a display unit, configured to display, on the first page of the terminal, a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the display unit, the first The instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start the first control;
    输入单元,用于接收用户对所述显示单元显示的所述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入;An input unit, configured to receive a first input of a first icon in the first page displayed by the user on the display unit;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第一输入,将所述第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第一图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;The display unit is further configured to: in response to the first input, move the first icon from the first page to the first control, where the first icon is in the first page Application icon or folder icon;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述第一控件的第二输入;The input unit is further configured to receive a second input by the user to the first control;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,所述第二图标是所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。The display unit is further configured to: in response to the second input, move a second icon in the first control to an idle position of a second page of the terminal, where the second icon is An application icon or folder icon in the first control.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的终端,其特征在于,所述显示单元显示的第二页面与所述显示单元显示的第一页面相同,所述输入单元接收的第二输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,并指示所述终端将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示;The terminal according to claim 10, wherein the second page displayed by the display unit is the same as the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second input received by the input unit is used for the first page Selecting the second icon in the control, and instructing the terminal to move the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page for display;
    所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The display unit is configured to: in response to the second input of the first control by the user, move the second icon in the first control to the idle position of the second page of the terminal, including:
    所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示。The display unit is configured to move the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page in response to a second input of the second icon in the first control by the user.
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的终端,其特征在于,所述输入单元,还用于在所述显示单元将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前,接收用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入;The terminal according to claim 10, wherein the input unit is further configured to: in the display unit, move a second icon in the first control to an idle position of a second page of the terminal Before displaying, receiving a third input of the second icon in the first control by the user;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,所述第三输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标;The display unit is further configured to: in response to a third input by the user to the second icon in the first control, the third input is used to select the second icon from the first control, Displaying the selected second icon in a preset manner;
    其中,所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The display unit is configured to: in response to a second input of the first control by the user, move the second icon in the first control to an idle position of the second page of the terminal, including :
    所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将被选择的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示;The display unit is configured to: in response to a second input by the user to the first control, move the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page of the terminal;
    其中,所述输入单元接收的第二输入与所述输入单元接收的第三输入不同。The second input received by the input unit is different from the third input received by the input unit.
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的终端,其特征在于,所述显示单元显示的第二页面与所述显示单元显示的第一页面不同,且所述第二页面是在第一侧与所述第一页面相邻的显示页面,所述第一侧是左侧或者右侧;The terminal according to claim 10, wherein the second page displayed by the display unit is different from the first page displayed by the display unit, and the second page is on the first side and the first page a page adjacent to the page, the first side being the left side or the right side;
    所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,将所述第一控件中 的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,包括:The display unit is configured to respond to a second input of the first control by a user, in the first control The second icon is displayed to be displayed in an idle position of the second page of the terminal, including:
    所述显示单元,用于响应于用户对所述第一控件的第二输入,当所述第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于所述第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,所述终端将所述第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至所述第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并将所述第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至所述终端的第三页面的空闲位置上显示;The display unit is configured to respond to a second input of the first control by the user, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control The terminal moves the M second icons in the first control to the M free positions of the second page, and moves the remaining NM second icons in the first control. Displayed to an idle location of the third page of the terminal;
    其中,所述第三页面是在所述第一侧与所述第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者所述第三页面是所述第一页面。The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  14. 根据权利要求10-13中任一项所述的终端,其特征在于,A terminal according to any one of claims 10-13, characterized in that
    所述显示单元,用于将所述第一控件悬浮显示在所述第一页面上;或The display unit is configured to hover the first control on the first page; or
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述第一控件的移动手势;所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述移动手势,按照所述移动手势的滑动轨迹在所述第一页面上移动显示所述第一控件;或所述显示单元显示的第一控件的面积小于所述显示单元显示的第一页面的面积;或The input unit is further configured to receive a movement gesture of the first control by the user; the display unit is further configured to, according to the movement gesture, follow the sliding track of the movement gesture on the first page Moving the first control; or the area of the first control displayed by the display unit is smaller than the area of the first page displayed by the display unit; or
    所述显示单元,还用于在将所述第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示的过程中,显示所述第一图标逐渐变小的动态图像;或The display unit is further configured to display a dynamic image in which the first icon is gradually reduced in a process of moving the first icon from the first page to the first control; or
    当所述第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,所述第一控件的面积小于所述第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时所述第一控件的面积。When an application icon and/or a folder icon is not included in the first control, an area of the first control is smaller than an area of the first control when the first control includes an application icon and/or a folder icon .
  15. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:A terminal, comprising:
    显示单元,用于响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件,所述第一控件用于管理所述终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述终端启动所述第一控件;a display unit, configured to display, on the first page of the terminal, a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, The first instruction is used to instruct the terminal to start the first control;
    输入单元,用于接收用户对所述第一控件的第一输入;An input unit, configured to receive a first input of the first control by a user;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示所述终端中的至少一个文件夹图标;The display unit is further configured to display at least one folder icon in the terminal in the first control in response to the first input;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,所述第二输入用于选择所述第一文件夹图标;The input unit is further configured to receive a second input by the user to the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, where the second input is used to select the first folder icon;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标;The display unit is further configured to display the selected first folder icon in a first preset manner in response to the second input;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入;The input unit is further configured to receive a third input of the first icon in the first page by the user;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第三输入,将所述第一图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。The display unit is further configured to move the first icon to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon in response to the third input.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的终端,其特征在于,所述输入单元,还用于在所述显示单元响应于用户对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示所述终端中的至少一个文件夹图标之后,接收用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,所述第四输入与所述第二输入不同;The terminal according to claim 15, wherein the input unit is further configured to display the first control in the first control in response to a first input of the first control by a user After receiving at least one folder icon in the terminal, receiving a fourth input of the second folder icon of the at least one folder icon by the user, the fourth input being different from the second input;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第四输入,显示所述第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标。The display unit is further configured to display an application icon in a folder corresponding to the second folder icon in response to the fourth input.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的终端,其特征在于,所述输入单元,还用于在所述显示单元响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,接收用 户对所述第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,所述第二图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;The terminal according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the input unit is further configured to receive, after the display unit displays the first control on the first page of the terminal, in response to the first instruction use a fifth input of the second icon in the first page, the second icon being an application icon or a folder icon in the first page;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第五输入,将所述第二图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示;The display unit is further configured to: move the second icon from the first page to the first control in response to the fifth input;
    所述输入单元,还用于在所述显示单元响应于用户对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标之后,接收用户对所述第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,所述第六输入用于从所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择所述第三图标;The input unit is further configured to display the selected first folder in a first preset manner in response to the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon by the display unit After the icon, receiving a sixth input of the third icon in the first control by the user, the sixth input is used to select the third icon from an application icon or a folder icon in the first control;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于所述第六输入,将被选择的第三图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。The display unit is further configured to: in response to the sixth input, move the selected third icon to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon for display.
  18. 根据权利要求15-17中任一项所述的终端,其特征在于,所述显示单元,还用于在响应于第一指令,在所述终端的第一页面上显示第一控件之后,响应于用户对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,所述新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;The terminal according to any one of claims 15-17, wherein the display unit is further configured to respond after displaying the first control on the first page of the terminal in response to the first instruction And displaying, by the user, the first input to the first control, displaying a new folder icon in the first control, where the new folder icon is used to create a new folder;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述新建文件夹图标的输入;The input unit is further configured to receive a user input to the newly created folder icon;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于用户对所述新建文件夹图标的输入,在所述第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;The display unit is further configured to display, in response to the user input to the newly created folder icon, a folder name input item of a new folder icon in the first control;
    所述输入单元,还用于接收用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入;The input unit is further configured to receive a user input to the folder name input item;
    所述显示单元,还用于响应于用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入,在所述第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。The display unit is further configured to display the named new folder icon in the first control in response to the user inputting the folder name input item.
  19. 一种图形用户界面GUI,所述GUI存储在终端中,所述终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,所述一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在所述存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序,其特征在于,所述GUI包括:A graphical user interface GUI, the GUI being stored in a terminal, the terminal comprising a touch screen, a memory, one or more processors, the one or more processors for executing one or more stored in the memory Computer program, characterized in that the GUI comprises:
    响应于第一指令,在所述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,所述第一控件用于管理所述触摸屏显示的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述处理器启动所述第一控件;Displaying, on the touch screen, a first page including a first control, where the first control is used to manage an application icon and a folder icon displayed by the touch screen, the first instruction is used to indicate The processor starts the first control;
    响应于对所述第一页面中的第一图标的第一输入,在所述触摸屏上将所述第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第一图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;Responsive to moving the first icon from the first page to the first control on the touch screen in response to a first input to a first icon in the first page, the first icon An application icon or a folder icon in the first page;
    响应于对所述第一控件的第二输入,在所述触摸屏上将所述第一控件中的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,所述第二图标是所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标。Responsively displaying a second icon of the first control to an idle position of a second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to a second input to the first control, the second icon being An application icon or a folder icon in the first control.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述第二页面与所述第一页面相同,所述第二输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,并指示所述终端将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示;所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to claim 19, wherein said second page is the same as said first page, said second input being for selecting said second icon from said first control, and indicating The terminal moves the selected second icon to the idle position of the second page; the GUI further includes:
    响应于用户对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第二输入,在所述触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至所述第二页面的空闲位置上显示。In response to the user's second input to the second icon in the first control, the selected second icon is moved to the idle position of the second page on the touch screen for display.
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to claim 19, wherein the GUI further comprises:
    在响应于对所述第一控件的第二输入,在所述触摸屏上将所述第一控件中的第二 图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示之前,响应于对所述第一控件中的第二图标的第三输入,所述第三输入用于从所述第一控件中选择所述第二图标,在所述触摸屏上采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第二图标;Retrieving a second of the first controls on the touch screen in response to a second input to the first control The third input is for selecting from the first control in response to a third input to the second icon in the first control before the icon moves to the idle position of the second page of the terminal The second icon displays the selected second icon on the touch screen in a first preset manner;
    响应于对所述第一控件的第二输入,在所述触摸屏上将被选择的第二图标移动至所述终端的第二页面的空闲位置上显示,其中,所述第二输入与所述第三输入不同。Responsive to moving the selected second icon to an idle position of the second page of the terminal on the touch screen in response to the second input to the first control, wherein the second input is The third input is different.
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述第二页面与所述第一页面不同,且所述第二页面是在第一侧与所述第一页面相邻的显示页面,所述第一侧是左侧或者右侧;所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to claim 19, wherein the second page is different from the first page, and the second page is a display page adjacent to the first page on a first side, The first side is the left side or the right side; the GUI further includes:
    响应于对所述第一控件的第二输入,当所述第二页面的空闲位置的个数M小于所述第一控件中的第二图标的个数N时,在所述触摸屏上将所述第一控件中的M个第二图标,移动至所述第二页面的M个空闲位置上显示,并在所述触摸屏上将所述第一控件中剩余的N-M个第二图标,移动至所述触摸屏的第三页面的空闲位置上显示;Responding to the second input to the first control, when the number M of the idle positions of the second page is smaller than the number N of the second icons in the first control, Transmitting the M second icons in the first control, moving to the M free positions of the second page, and moving the remaining NM second icons in the first control to the touch screen to Displayed in an idle position of the third page of the touch screen;
    其中,所述第三页面是在所述第一侧与所述第二页面相邻的显示页面,或者所述第三页面是所述第一页面。The third page is a display page adjacent to the second page on the first side, or the third page is the first page.
  23. 根据权利要求19-22中任一项所述的GUI,其特征在于,A GUI according to any one of claims 19-22, wherein
    在所述触摸屏所显示的第一页面上悬浮显示所述第一控件;或Floating the first control on the first page displayed by the touch screen; or
    所述GUI还包括:The GUI also includes:
    响应于对所述第一控件的移动手势,按照所述移动手势的滑动轨迹,在所述触摸屏所显示的第一页面上移动显示所述第一控件;或And in response to the moving gesture to the first control, displaying the first control on a first page displayed by the touch screen according to a sliding trajectory of the moving gesture; or
    在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件的面积小于在所述触摸屏上显示的第一页面的面积;或An area of the first control displayed on the touch screen is smaller than an area of the first page displayed on the touch screen; or
    所述GUI还包括:The GUI also includes:
    在响应于所述第一输入,将所述第一图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示的过程中,在所述触摸屏上显示所述第一图标逐渐变小的动态图像;或In response to the first input, moving the first icon from the first page to the display in the first control, displaying the dynamic change of the first icon on the touch screen Image; or
    当所述第一控件中不包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时,所述第一控件的面积小于所述第一控件中包括应用图标和/或文件夹图标时所述第一控件的面积。When an application icon and/or a folder icon is not included in the first control, an area of the first control is smaller than an area of the first control when the first control includes an application icon and/or a folder icon .
  24. 一种图形用户界面GUI,所述GUI存储在终端中,所述终端包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,所述一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在所述存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序,其特征在于,所述GUI包括:A graphical user interface GUI, the GUI being stored in a terminal, the terminal comprising a touch screen, a memory, one or more processors, the one or more processors for executing one or more stored in the memory Computer program, characterized in that the GUI comprises:
    响应于第一指令,在所述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面,所述第一控件用于管理所述终端的显示页面中的应用图标和文件夹图标,所述第一指令用于指示所述终端启动所述第一控件;Displaying, on the touch screen, a first page including a first control, where the first control is configured to manage an application icon and a folder icon in a display page of the terminal, where the first instruction is used Instructing the terminal to start the first control;
    响应于对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示所述触摸屏中的至少一个文件夹图标;Displaying at least one of the touch screens in a first control displayed on the touch screen in response to a first input to the first control;
    响应于对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,所述第二输入用于选择所述第一文件夹图标,采用第一预设方式,在所述触摸屏上显示被选择的第一文件夹图标;Responding to a second input to the first folder icon of the at least one folder icon, the second input is for selecting the first folder icon, using a first preset manner, on the touch screen Display the selected first folder icon;
    响应于对所述第一页面中的第一图标的第三输入,在所述触摸屏上将所述第一图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。 The first icon is moved to a folder corresponding to the first folder icon on the touch screen in response to a third input to the first icon in the first page.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to claim 24, wherein the GUI further comprises:
    在响应于对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示所述触摸屏中的至少一个文件夹图标之后,响应于对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第二文件夹图标的第四输入,在所述触摸屏上显示所述第二文件夹图标对应的文件夹中的应用图标,所述第四输入与所述第二输入不同。Responsive to the at least one folder icon in the at least one folder icon after displaying the at least one of the touch screens in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control a fourth input of the second folder icon, the application icon in the folder corresponding to the second folder icon is displayed on the touch screen, and the fourth input is different from the second input.
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the GUI further comprises:
    在响应于第一指令,在所述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面之后,响应于对所述第一页面中的第二图标的第五输入,在所述触摸屏上将所述第二图标由所述第一页面移动至所述第一控件中显示,所述第二图标为所述第一页面中的应用图标或者文件夹图标;After displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen in response to the first instruction, in response to the fifth input to the second icon in the first page, the first The second icon is moved by the first page to be displayed in the first control, and the second icon is an application icon or a folder icon in the first page;
    在响应于对所述至少一个文件夹图标中的第一文件夹图标的第二输入,在所述触摸屏上采用第一预设方式显示被选择的第一文件夹图标之后,响应于对所述第一控件中的第三图标的第六输入,所述第六输入用于从所述第一控件中的应用图标或者文件夹图标中选择所述第三图标,在所述触摸屏上将被选择的第三图标移动至所述第一文件夹图标对应的文件夹中显示。In response to the second input of the first folder icon in the at least one folder icon, after displaying the selected first folder icon in the first preset manner on the touch screen, in response to the a sixth input of a third icon in the first control, the sixth input for selecting the third icon from an application icon or a folder icon in the first control, to be selected on the touch screen The third icon is moved to be displayed in a folder corresponding to the first folder icon.
  27. 根据权利要求24-26中任一项所述的GUI,其特征在于,所述GUI还包括:The GUI according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the GUI further comprises:
    在响应于第一指令,在所述触摸屏上显示包括第一控件的第一页面之后,响应于对所述第一控件的第一输入,在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新建文件夹图标,所述新建文件夹图标用于新建文件夹;After displaying the first page including the first control on the touch screen in response to the first instruction, displaying a new file in the first control displayed on the touch screen in response to the first input to the first control Folder icon, the new folder icon is used to create a new folder;
    响应于对所述新建文件夹图标的输入,在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示新的文件夹图标的文件夹名称输入项;Displaying, in response to the input of the newly created folder icon, a folder name input item of a new folder icon in a first control displayed on the touch screen;
    响应于用户对所述文件夹名称输入项的输入,在所述触摸屏上显示的第一控件中显示命名后的新的文件夹图标。In response to the user inputting the folder name entry, the named new folder icon is displayed in the first control displayed on the touch screen.
  28. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器和触摸屏;A terminal, comprising: one or more processors, a memory, and a touch screen;
    所述存储器、所述触摸屏与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述终端执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的移动应用图标的方法;所述触摸屏,用于显示所述处理器的生成的图像。The memory, the touch screen is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions, when the one or more processors execute the computer The method of the mobile application icon according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein the touch screen is configured to display a generated image of the processor.
  29. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在终端上运行时,使得所述终端执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的移动应用图标的方法。A computer storage medium, comprising computer instructions for causing a terminal to perform a method of a mobile application icon according to any one of claims 1-9 when the computer instruction is run on a terminal.
  30. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的移动应用图标的方法。 A computer program product, characterized by a method of causing a computer to execute a mobile application icon according to any one of claims 1-9 when the computer program product is run on a computer.
PCT/CN2017/100955 2017-09-07 2017-09-07 Method for moving application icons, and terminal WO2019047129A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2017/100955 WO2019047129A1 (en) 2017-09-07 2017-09-07 Method for moving application icons, and terminal
CN201780073702.4A CN110023894A (en) 2017-09-07 2017-09-07 A kind of mobile application figure calibration method and terminal

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2017/100955 WO2019047129A1 (en) 2017-09-07 2017-09-07 Method for moving application icons, and terminal

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019047129A1 true WO2019047129A1 (en) 2019-03-14

Family

ID=65634634

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/100955 WO2019047129A1 (en) 2017-09-07 2017-09-07 Method for moving application icons, and terminal

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110023894A (en)
WO (1) WO2019047129A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111338530A (en) * 2020-02-27 2020-06-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method of application program icon and electronic equipment
CN114721761A (en) * 2022-04-15 2022-07-08 青岛海信移动通信技术股份有限公司 Terminal device, application icon management method and storage medium

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112905095B (en) * 2021-03-19 2022-07-05 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 Object operation processing method and device and computer storage medium
CN113703623A (en) * 2021-07-19 2021-11-26 维沃移动通信(杭州)有限公司 Program icon display method, device, electronic equipment and medium

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102981711A (en) * 2012-11-22 2013-03-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for moving application icons on touch screen
CN103631482A (en) * 2013-11-29 2014-03-12 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 Display method and terminal of icons
CN104298428A (en) * 2014-09-24 2015-01-21 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Method and device for moving application icons
CN105487749A (en) * 2015-11-23 2016-04-13 小米科技有限责任公司 Application icon organizing method and device
CN105718149A (en) * 2016-01-26 2016-06-29 上海斐讯数据通信技术有限公司 Management method of application icons on mobile terminal and mobile terminal
US20160349977A1 (en) * 2014-07-31 2016-12-01 Le Holdings (Beijing) Co., Ltd. Method and device for operating controls in terminal based on remote-control equipment

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102681778A (en) * 2012-04-25 2012-09-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for performing batch management on desktop icons and digital mobile equipment
CN104102427B (en) * 2014-07-10 2017-06-09 努比亚技术有限公司 The moving method and device of a kind of mobile terminal and its many icons
CN106873842A (en) * 2015-12-10 2017-06-20 北京奇虎科技有限公司 Desktop icons batch method for sorting and device and terminal
CN105824509A (en) * 2016-04-25 2016-08-03 乐视控股(北京)有限公司 Method and device for arranging icons

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102981711A (en) * 2012-11-22 2013-03-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for moving application icons on touch screen
CN103631482A (en) * 2013-11-29 2014-03-12 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 Display method and terminal of icons
US20160349977A1 (en) * 2014-07-31 2016-12-01 Le Holdings (Beijing) Co., Ltd. Method and device for operating controls in terminal based on remote-control equipment
CN104298428A (en) * 2014-09-24 2015-01-21 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 Method and device for moving application icons
CN105487749A (en) * 2015-11-23 2016-04-13 小米科技有限责任公司 Application icon organizing method and device
CN105718149A (en) * 2016-01-26 2016-06-29 上海斐讯数据通信技术有限公司 Management method of application icons on mobile terminal and mobile terminal

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111338530A (en) * 2020-02-27 2020-06-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method of application program icon and electronic equipment
CN111338530B (en) * 2020-02-27 2021-08-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method of application program icon and electronic equipment
CN114721761A (en) * 2022-04-15 2022-07-08 青岛海信移动通信技术股份有限公司 Terminal device, application icon management method and storage medium
CN114721761B (en) * 2022-04-15 2023-09-19 青岛海信移动通信技术有限公司 Terminal equipment, application icon management method and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110023894A (en) 2019-07-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11307760B2 (en) Terminal interface display method and terminal
CN108845782B (en) Method for connecting mobile terminal and external display and apparatus for implementing the same
AU2021209226A1 (en) Display method and apparatus
WO2017088131A1 (en) Method and apparatus for rapidly dividing screen, electronic device, display interface and storage medium
US20200183574A1 (en) Multi-Task Operation Method and Electronic Device
WO2020258929A1 (en) Folder interface switching method and terminal device
WO2021083132A1 (en) Icon moving method and electronic device
WO2019000438A1 (en) Method of displaying graphic user interface and electronic device
WO2019084827A1 (en) Management of a plurality of free windows in pull-down menu of notification bar
WO2019104677A1 (en) Method for displaying application shortcut menus on different screens
WO2020134744A1 (en) Icon moving method and mobile terminal
WO2020192428A1 (en) Object management method and mobile terminal
WO2019000287A1 (en) Icon display method and device
US20140055395A1 (en) Method and apparatus for controlling scrolling
WO2015043194A1 (en) Virtual keyboard display method and apparatus, and terminal
AU2017433305B2 (en) Task switching method and terminal
WO2017193496A1 (en) Application data processing method and apparatus, and terminal device
WO2019047129A1 (en) Method for moving application icons, and terminal
US20240012605A1 (en) Data Processing Method and Mobile Device
WO2019072172A1 (en) Method for displaying multiple content cards, and terminal device
WO2017128986A1 (en) Selection method, device and storage medium for multimedia menu item
KR102117295B1 (en) Method and apparatus for pairing electronic devices
CN110114748A (en) A kind of display processing method and electronic equipment
WO2018039914A1 (en) Method for copying data, and user terminal
WO2019219084A1 (en) Display control method and terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17924433

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17924433

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1